ChipFind - документация

Электронный компонент: ST72F324K6T6

Скачать:  PDF   ZIP

Document Outline

Rev. 2.0
May 2004
1/164
This is preliminary information on a new product now in development or undergoing evaluation. Details are subject to change without notice.
ST72F324, ST72324B
5V RANGE 8-BIT MCU WITH 8 TO 32K FLASH/ROM,
10-BIT ADC, 4 TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACE
PRELIMINARY DATA
s
Memories
8 to 32K dual voltage High Density Flash (HD-
Flash) or ROM with read-out protection capa-
bility. In-Application Programming and In-
Circuit Programming for HDFlash devices
384 to 1K bytes RAM
HDFlash endurance: 100 cycles, data reten-
tion: 20 years at 55C
s
Clock, Reset And Supply Management
Enhanced low voltage supervisor (LVD) for
main supply with programmable reset thresh-
olds and auxiliary voltage detector (AVD) with
interrupt capability
Clock sources: crystal/ceramic resonator os-
cillators, internal RC oscillator, clock security
system and bypass for external clock
PLL for 2x frequency multiplication
Four Power Saving Modes: Halt, Active-Halt,
Wait and Slow
s
Interrupt Management
Nested interrupt controller
10 interrupt vectors plus TRAP and RESET
9/6 external interrupt lines (on 4 vectors)
s
Up to 32 I/O Ports
32/24 multifunctional bidirectional I/O lines
22/17 alternate function lines
12/10 high sink outputs
s
4 Timers
Main Clock Controller with: Real time base,
Beep and Clock-out capabilities
Configurable watchdog timer
16-bit Timer A with: 1 input capture, 1 output
compare, external clock input, PWM and
pulse generator modes
16-bit Timer B with: 2 input captures, 2 output
compares, PWM and pulse generator modes
s
2 Communication Interfaces
SPI synchronous serial interface
SCI asynchronous serial interface
s
1 Analog Peripheral (low current coupling)
10-bit ADC with up to 12 robust input ports
s
Instruction Set
8-bit Data Manipulation
63 Basic Instructions
17 main Addressing Modes
8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Instruction
s
Development Tools
Full hardware/software development package
In-Circuit Testing capability
Device Summary
TQFP44
10 x 10
SDIP42
600 mil
SDIP32
400 mil
TQFP32
7 x 7
Features
ST72F324(J/K)6 ST72F324(J/K)4 ST72F324(J/K)2 ST72324B(J/K)6 ST72324B(J/K)4 ST72324B(J/K)2
Program memory -
bytes
Flash 32K
Flash 16K
Flash 8K
ROM 32K
ROM 16K
ROM 8K
RAM (stack) - bytes
1024 (256)
512 (256)
384 (256)
1024 (256)
512 (256)
384 (256)
Voltage Range
3.8V to 5.5V
Temp. Range
up to -40C to +125C
Packages
SDIP42, TQFP44 10x10,SDIP32, TQFP32 7x7
1
Table of Contents
164
2/164
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2
MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3.1
Read-out Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.4
ICC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.5
ICP (IN-CIRCUIT PROGRAMMING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.6
IAP (IN-APPLICATION PROGRAMMING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.7
RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.7.1
Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2
MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3
CPU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1
PHASE LOCKED LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.2
MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.3
RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3.2
Asynchronous External RESET pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3.3
External Power-On RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.4
Internal Low Voltage Detector (LVD) RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.5
Internal Watchdog RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.4
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (SI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.4.1
Low Voltage Detector (LVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.4.2
Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.4.3
Clock Security System (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4.4
Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4.5
Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.2
MASKING AND PROCESSING FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.3
INTERRUPTS AND LOW POWER MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.4
CONCURRENT & NESTED MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.5
INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.6
EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.6.1
I/O Port Interrupt Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.7
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
8 POWER SAVING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.2
SLOW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2
Table of Contents
164
3/164
8.3
WAIT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8.4
ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8.4.1
ACTIVE-HALT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8.4.2
HALT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.2.1
Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.2.2
Output Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.2.3
Alternate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3
I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.4
LOW POWER MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.5
INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.5.1
I/O Port Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1.4 How to Program the Watchdog Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
10.1.5 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
10.1.6 Hardware Watchdog Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
10.1.7 Using Halt Mode with the WDG (WDGHALT option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
10.1.8 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
10.1.9 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
10.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC) . 56
10.2.1 Programmable CPU Clock Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
10.2.2 Clock-out Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
10.2.3 Real Time Clock Timer (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
10.2.4 Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
10.2.5 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
10.2.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
10.2.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
10.3 16-BIT TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
10.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
10.3.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
10.3.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
10.3.4 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.5 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.6 Summary of Timer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4.3 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4.4 Clock Phase and Clock Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.4.5 Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1
Table of Contents
164
4/164
10.4.6 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10.4.7 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10.4.8 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
10.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.5.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.5.3 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.5.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
10.5.5 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10.5.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10.5.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10.6 10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.6.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.6.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.6.4 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.6.5 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.6.6 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11 INSTRUCTION SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11.1 CPU ADDRESSING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11.1.1 Inherent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.1.2 Immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.1.3 Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11.1.7 Relative mode (Direct, Indirect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
12 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1.2 Typical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1.3 Typical curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1.4 Loading capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.1.5 Pin input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
12.2.1 Voltage Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
12.2.2 Current Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
12.2.3 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.3.1 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.4 LVD/AVD CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12.4.1 Low Voltage Detector (LVD) thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12.4.2 Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD) Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12.5 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.5.1 CURRENT CONSUMPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.5.2 Supply and Clock Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1
Table of Contents
164
5/164
12.5.3 On-Chip Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
12.6 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.6.1 General Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.6.2 External Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.6.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
12.6.4 RC Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
12.6.5 Clock Security System (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
12.6.6 PLL Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
12.7 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.7.1 RAM and Hardware Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.7.2 FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.8 EMC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12.8.1 Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic Susceptibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12.8.2 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12.8.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical Sensitivity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
12.9 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12.9.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12.9.2 Output Driving Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.10 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
12.10.1Asynchronous RESET Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
12.10.2ICCSEL/VPP Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
12.11 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
12.11.116-Bit Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
12.12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
12.12.1SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
12.13 10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
12.13.1Analog Power Supply and Reference Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
12.13.2General PCB Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
12.13.3ADC Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
13.3 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
14 ST72324B DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
14.1 FLASH OPTION BYTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
14.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE . . . . 153
14.2.1 Version-Specific Sales Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
14.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
14.3.1 Socket and Emulator Adapter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
14.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
15 KNOWN LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.1 EXTERNAL RC OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.2 CSS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.3 SAFE CONNECTION OF OSC1/OSC2 PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.4 UNEXPECTED RESET FETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.4.1 Clearing active interrupts outside interrupt routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1
Table of Contents
164
6/164
15.5 16-BIT TIMER PWM MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.6 SCI WRONG BREAK DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
15.7 LIMITATIONS SPECIFIC TO 16K ROM DEVICES ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.7.1 Read-Out Protection with LVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.7.2 I/O Port A and F Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.8 LIMITATIONS IN 32K ROM DEVICES ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
16 REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
1
To obtain the most recent version of this datasheet,
please check at www.st.com>products>technical literature>datasheet.
Please also pay special attention to the Section
"KNOWN LIMITATIONS" on page 161
.
ST72F324, ST72324B
7/164
1 INTRODUCTION
The ST72F324 and ST72324B devices are mem-
bers of the ST7 microcontroller family designed for
the 5V operating range.
The 32-pin devices are designed for mid-range
applications
The 42/44-pin devices target the same range of
applications requiring more than 24 I/O ports.
All devices are based on a common industry-
standard 8-bit core, featuring an enhanced instruc-
tion set and are available with FLASH or ROM pro-
gram memory.
Under software control, all devices can be placed
in WAIT, SLOW, ACTIVE-HALT or HALT mode,
reducing power consumption when the application
is in idle or stand-by state.
The enhanced instruction set and addressing
modes of the ST7 offer both power and flexibility to
software developers, enabling the design of highly
efficient and compact application code. In addition
to standard 8-bit data management, all ST7 micro-
controllers feature true bit manipulation, 8x8 un-
signed multiplication and indirect addressing
modes.
Figure 1. Device Block Diagram
8-BIT CORE
ALU
AD
D
R
ESS
AN
D
D
A
T
A
BU
S
OSC1
V
PP
CONTROL
PROGRAM
(8K - 60K Bytes)
V
DD
RESET
PORT F
PF7:6,4,2:0
TIMER A
BEEP
PORT A
RAM
(384 - 1024 Bytes)
PORT C
10-BIT ADC
V
AREF
V
SSA
PORT B
PB4:0
PORT E
PE1:0
(2 bits)
SCI
TIMER B
PA7:3
(5 bits on J devices)
PORT D
PD5:0
SPI
PC7:0
(8 bits)
V
SS
WATCHDOG
OSC
LVD
OSC2
MEMORY
MCC/RTC/BEEP
(4 bits on K devices)
(5 bits on J devices)
(3 bits on K devices)
(6 bits on J devices)
(2 bits on K devices)
(6 bits on J devices)
(5 bits on K devices)
3
ST72F324, ST72324B
8/164
2 PIN DESCRIPTION
Figure 2. 42-Pin SDIP and 44-Pin TQFP Package Pinouts
M
C
O

/ A
I
N
8
/
PF
0
BE
EP /
(
H
S)
PF
1
(
H
S)
PF
2
O
C
MP1
_
A / AIN
1
0

/

PF
4
I
C
AP1
_
A
/
(
H
S)
PF
6
EXT
C
L
K_
A /
(
H
S)
PF
7
V
DD_
0
V
SS_
0
AIN
5
/
P
D
5
V
AR
E
F
V
SSA
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ei2
ei3
ei0
ei1
PB3
(HS) PB4
AIN0 / PD0
AIN1 / PD1
AIN2 / PD2
AIN3 / PD3
AIN4 / PD4
RDI / PE1
PB0
PB1
PB2
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK
PC5 / MOSI / AIN14
PC4 / MISO / ICCDATA
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B
PC1 / OCMP1_B / AIN13
PC0 / OCMP2_B / AIN12
V
SS_1
V
DD_1
PA3 (HS)
PC7 / SS / AIN15
V
SS
_2
R
ESE
T
V
PP
/
I
CCS
E
L
PA7
(
H
S)
PA6
(
H
S)
PA5
(
H
S)
PA4
(
H
S)
PE0
/
T
D
O
V
DD
_2
OS
C
1
OS
C
2
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
39
40
41
42
(HS) PB4
AIN0 / PD0
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6
AIN10 / OCMP1_A / PF4
(HS) PF2
BEEP / (HS) PF1
MCO / AIN8 / PF0
AIN5 / PD5
AIN4 / PD4
AIN3 / PD3
AIN2 / PD2
AIN1 / PD1
V
SSA
V
AREF
PB3
PB2
PA4 (HS)
PA5 (HS)
PA6 (HS)
PA7 (HS)
V
PP
/ ICCSEL
RESET
V
SS
_2
V
DD
_2
PE0 / TDO
PE1 / RDI
PB0
PB1
OSC1
OSC2
ei3
ei0
ei2
ei1
21
20
17
18
19
AIN14 / MOSI / PC5
ICCDATA / MISO / PC4
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3
ICAP2_B/ (HS) PC2
AIN13 / OCMP1_B / PC1
26
25
24
23
22
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK
PC7 / SS / AIN15
PA3 (HS)
V
DD_1
V
SS_1
eix
associated external interrupt vector
(HS) 20mA high sink capability
ST72F324, ST72324B
9/164
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont'd)
Figure 3. 32-Pin SDIP Package Pinout
Figure 4. 32-Pin TQFP 7x7 Package Pinout
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
29
30
31
32
(HS) PB4
AIN0 / PD0
AIN14 / MOSI / PC5
ICCDATA/ MISO / PC4
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3
ICAP2_B / (HS) PC2
AIN13 / OCMP1_B / PC1
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7
BEEP / (HS) PF1
MCO / AIN8 / PF0
V
SSA
V
AREF
AIN1 / PD1
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6
OCMP1_A / AIN10 / PF4
PB3
PB0
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK
PC7 / SS / AIN15
PA3 (HS)
PA4 (HS)
PA6 (HS)
PA7 (HS)
V
PP
/ ICCSEL
OSC2
OSC1
V
DD
_2
PE0 / TDO
PE1 / RDI
V
SS
_2
RESET
ei0
ei3
ei2
ei1
eix
associated external interrupt vector
(HS) 20mA high sink capability
IC
C
D
AT
A
/
M
I
SO
/
PC
4
A
I
N
1
4
/
M
O
SI
/
PC
5
I
C
C
C
L
K
/
SC
K /
PC
6
AI
N
1
5
/
S
S
/
PC
7
(
H
S)

PA3
A
I
N1
3 /
OC
M
P
1_B
/

P
C
1
IC
AP2
_
B

/ (
H
S)
PC
2
IC
AP1
_
B

/ (
H
S)
PC
3
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ei1
ei3
ei0
OCMP1_A / AIN10 / PF4
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0
V
AREF
V
SSA
MCO / AIN8 / PF0
BEEP / (HS) PF1
V
PP
/ ICCSEL
PA7 (HS)
PA6 (HS)
PA4 (HS)
OSC1
OSC2
V
SS
_2
RESET
PB0
PE1
/
R
D
I
PE0
/
T
D
O
V
DD
_2
PD
1
/
AIN
1
PD
0
/
AIN
0
PB4
(
H
S)
PB3
ei2
eix
associated external interrupt vector
(HS) 20mA high sink capability
ST72F324, ST72324B
10/164
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont'd)
For external pin connection guidelines, refer to See "ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS" on page 116.
Legend / Abbreviations for
Table 1
:
Type:
I = input, O = output, S = supply
Input level:
A = Dedicated analog input
In/Output level: C = CMOS 0.3V
DD
/0.7V
DD
C
T
= CMOS 0.3V
DD
/0.7V
DD
with input trigger
Output level:
HS = 20mA high sink (on N-buffer only)
Port and control configuration:
Input:
float = floating, wpu = weak pull-up, int = interrupt
1)
, ana = analog ports
Output:
OD = open drain
2)
, PP = push-pull
Refer to
"I/O PORTS" on page 45
for more details on the software configuration of the I/O ports.
The RESET configuration of each pin is shown in bold. This configuration is valid as long as the device is
in reset state.
Table 1. Device Pin Description
Pin n
Pin Name
Typ
e
Level
Port
Main
function
(after
reset)
Alternate Function
TQ
F
P
4
4
SDIP4
2
TQ
F
P
3
2
SDIP3
2
Inpu
t
Outpu
t
Input
Output
float
wpu
int
ana
OD
PP
6
1 30 1
PB4 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
ei3
X
X
Port B4
7
2 31 2
PD0/AIN0
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D0
ADC Analog Input 0
8
3 32 3
PD1/AIN1
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D1
ADC Analog Input 1
9
4
PD2/AIN2
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D2
ADC Analog Input 2
10 5
PD3/AIN3
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D3
ADC Analog Input 3
11 6
PD4/AIN4
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D4
ADC Analog Input 4
12 7
PD5/AIN5
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port D5
ADC Analog Input 5
13 8
1
4
V
AREF
S
Analog Reference Voltage for ADC
14 9
2
5
V
SSA
S
Analog Ground Voltage
15 10 3
6
PF0/MCO/AIN8
I/O C
T
X
ei1
X
X
X
Port F0
Main clock
out (f
OSC
/2)
ADC Analog
Input 8
16 11 4
7
PF1 (HS)/BEEP
I/O C
T
HS
X
ei1
X
X
Port F1
Beep signal output
17 12
PF2 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
ei1
X
X
Port F2
18 13 5
8
PF4/OCMP1_A/
AIN10
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port F4
Timer A Out-
put Com-
pare 1
ADC Analog
Input 10
19 14 6
9
PF6 (HS)/ICAP1_A
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port F6
Timer A Input Capture 1
20 15 7 10
PF7 (HS)/
EXTCLK_A
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port F7
Timer A External Clock
Source
21
V
DD_0
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage
22
V
SS_0
S
Digital Ground Voltage
23 16 8 11
PC0/OCMP2_B/
AIN12
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port C0
Timer B Out-
put Com-
pare 2
ADC Analog
Input 12
ST72F324, ST72324B
11/164
24 17 9 12
PC1/OCMP1_B/
AIN13
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port C1
Timer B Out-
put Com-
pare 1
ADC Analog
Input 13
25 18 10 13 PC2 (HS)/ICAP2_B
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port C2
Timer B Input Capture 2
26 19 11 14 PC3 (HS)/ICAP1_B
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port C3
Timer B Input Capture 1
27 20 12 15
PC4/MISO/ICCDA-
TA
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
Port C4
SPI Master
In / Slave
Out Data
ICC Data In-
put
28 21 13 16 PC5/MOSI/AIN14
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port C5
SPI Master
Out / Slave
In Data
ADC Analog
Input 14
29 22 14 17 PC6/SCK/ICCCLK
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
Port C6
SPI Serial
Clock
ICC Clock
Output
30 23 15 18 PC7/SS/AIN15
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
X
Port C7
SPI Slave
Select (ac-
tive low)
ADC Analog
Input 15
31 24 16 19 PA3 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
ei0
X
X
Port A3
32 25
V
DD_1
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage
33 26
V
SS_1
S
Digital Ground Voltage
34 27 17 20 PA4 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port A4
35 28
PA5 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
X
X
X
Port A5
36 29 18 21 PA6 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
T
Port A6
1)
37 30 19 22 PA7 (HS)
I/O C
T
HS
X
T
Port A7
1)
38 31 20 23 V
PP
/ICCSEL
I
Must be tied low. In the flash pro-
gramming mode, this pin acts as the
programming voltage input V
PP
. See
Section 12.10.2
for more details. High
voltage must not be applied to ROM
devices.
39 32 21 24 RESET
I/O C
T
Top priority non maskable interrupt.
40 33 22 25 V
SS_2
S
Digital Ground Voltage
41 34 23 26 OSC2
O
Resonator oscillator inverter output
42 35 24 27 OSC1
I
External clock input or Resonator os-
cillator inverter input
43 36 25 28 V
DD_2
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage
44 37 26 29 PE0/TDO
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
Port E0
SCI Transmit Data Out
1 38 27 30 PE1/RDI
I/O C
T
X
X
X
X
Port E1
SCI Receive Data In
2 39 28 31 PB0
I/O C
T
X
ei2
X
X
Port B0
Caution: Negative cur-
rent injection not al-
lowed on this pin
5)
3 40
PB1
I/O C
T
X
ei2
X
X
Port B1
4 41
PB2
I/O C
T
X
ei2
X
X
Port B2
5 42 29 32 PB3
I/O C
T
X
ei2
X
X
Port B3
Pin n
Pin Name
Ty
p
e
Level
Port
Main
function
(after
reset)
Alternate Function
TQ
FP44
SD
IP42
TQ
FP32
SD
IP32
In
put
Ou
tput
Input
Output
fl
oat
wp
u
int
an
a
OD
PP
ST72F324, ST72324B
12/164
Notes:
1. In the interrupt input column, "eiX" defines the associated external interrupt vector. If the weak pull-up
column (wpu) is merged with the interrupt column (int), then the I/O configuration is pull-up interrupt input,
else the configuration is floating interrupt input.
2. In the open drain output column, "T" defines a true open drain I/O (P-Buffer and protection diode to V
DD
are not implemented). See See "I/O PORTS" on page 45. and
Section 12.9 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTER-
ISTICS
for more details.
3. OSC1 and OSC2 pins connect a crystal/ceramic resonator, or an external source to the on-chip oscil-
lator; see
Section 1 INTRODUCTION
and
Section 12.6 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
for
more details.
4. On the chip, each I/O port has 8 pads. Pads that are not bonded to external pins are in input pull-up con-
figuration after reset. The configuration of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid added current
consumption.
5. For details refer to
Section 12.9.1 on page 134
ST72F324, ST72324B
13/164
3 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP
As shown in
Figure 5
, the MCU is capable of ad-
dressing 64K bytes of memories and I/O registers.
The available memory locations consist of 128
bytes of register locations, up to 1024 bytes of
RAM and up to 32 Kbytes of user program memo-
ry. The RAM space includes up to 256 bytes for
the stack from 0100h to 01FFh.
The highest address bytes contain the user reset
and interrupt vectors.
IMPORTANT: Memory locations marked as "Re-
served" must never be accessed. Accessing a re-
seved area can have unpredictable effects on the
device.
Figure 5. Memory Map
0000h
RAM
Program Memory
(32K, 16K or 8K)
Interrupt & Reset Vectors
HW Registers
0080h
007Fh
7FFFh
(see
Table 2
)
8000h
FFDFh
FFE0h
FFFFh
(see
Table 8
)
0480h
Reserved
047Fh
Short Addressing
RAM (zero page)
256 Bytes Stack
16-bit Addressing
RAM
0100h
01FFh
027Fh
0080h
0200h
00FFh
32 KBytes
8000h
FFFFh
(1024,
or 047Fh
16 KBytes
C000h
512 or 384 Bytes)
8 Kbytes
E000h
ST72F324, ST72324B
14/164
Table 2. Hardware Register Map
Address
Block
Register
Label
Register Name
Reset
Status
Remarks
0000h
0001h
0002h
Port A
2)
PADR
PADDR
PAOR
Port A Data Register
Port A Data Direction Register
Port A Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
0003h
0004h
0005h
Port B
2)
PBDR
PBDDR
PBOR
Port B Data Register
Port B Data Direction Register
Port B Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
0006h
0007h
0008h
Port C
PCDR
PCDDR
PCOR
Port C Data Register
Port C Data Direction Register
Port C Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
Port D
2)
PDADR
PDDDR
PDOR
Port D Data Register
Port D Data Direction Register
Port D Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
Port E
2)
PEDR
PEDDR
PEOR
Port E Data Register
Port E Data Direction Register
Port E Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
2)
R/W
2)
000Fh
0010h
0011h
Port F
2)
PFDR
PFDDR
PFOR
Port F Data Register
Port F Data Direction Register
Port F Option Register
00h
1)
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
0012h
to
0020h
Reserved Area (15 Bytes)
0021h
0022h
0023h
SPI
SPIDR
SPICR
SPICSR
SPI Data I/O Register
SPI Control Register
SPI Control/Status Register
xxh
0xh
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
0024h
0025h
0026h
0027h
ITC
ISPR0
ISPR1
ISPR2
ISPR3
Interrupt Software Priority Register 0
Interrupt Software Priority Register 1
Interrupt Software Priority Register 2
Interrupt Software Priority Register 3
FFh
FFh
FFh
FFh
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0028h
EICR
External Interrupt Control Register
00h
R/W
0029h
FLASH
FCSR
Flash Control/Status Register
00h
R/W
002Ah
WATCHDOG
WDGCR
Watchdog Control Register
7Fh
R/W
002Bh
Reserved Area (1 Byte)
002Ch
002Dh
MCC
MCCSR
MCCBCR
Main Clock Control / Status Register
Main Clock Controller: Beep Control Register
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
002Eh
to
0030h
Reserved Area (3 Bytes)
ST72F324, ST72324B
15/164
0031h
0032h
0033h
0034h
0035h
0036h
0037h
0038h
0039h
003Ah
003Bh
003Ch
003Dh
003Eh
003Fh
TIMER A
TACR2
TACR1
TACSR
TAIC1HR
TAIC1LR
TAOC1HR
TAOC1LR
TACHR
TACLR
TAACHR
TAACLR
TAIC2HR
TAIC2LR
TAOC2HR
TAOC2LR
Timer A Control Register 2
Timer A Control Register 1
Timer A Control/Status Register
3)4)
Timer A Input Capture 1 High Register
Timer A Input Capture 1 Low Register
Timer A Output Compare 1 High Register
Timer A Output Compare 1 Low Register
Timer A Counter High Register
Timer A Counter Low Register
Timer A Alternate Counter High Register
Timer A Alternate Counter Low Register
Timer A Input Capture 2 High Register
3)
Timer A Input Capture 2 Low Register
3)
Timer A Output Compare 2 High Register
4)
Timer A Output Compare 2 Low Register
4)
00h
00h
xxxx x0xxb
xxh
xxh
80h
00h
FFh
FCh
FFh
FCh
xxh
xxh
80h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
0040h
Reserved Area (1 Byte)
0041h
0042h
0043h
0044h
0045h
0046h
0047h
0048h
0049h
004Ah
004Bh
004Ch
004Dh
004Eh
004Fh
TIMER B
TBCR2
TBCR1
TBCSR
TBIC1HR
TBIC1LR
TBOC1HR
TBOC1LR
TBCHR
TBCLR
TBACHR
TBACLR
TBIC2HR
TBIC2LR
TBOC2HR
TBOC2LR
Timer B Control Register 2
Timer B Control Register 1
Timer B Control/Status Register
Timer B Input Capture 1 High Register
Timer B Input Capture 1 Low Register
Timer B Output Compare 1 High Register
Timer B Output Compare 1 Low Register
Timer B Counter High Register
Timer B Counter Low Register
Timer B Alternate Counter High Register
Timer B Alternate Counter Low Register
Timer B Input Capture 2 High Register
Timer B Input Capture 2 Low Register
Timer B Output Compare 2 High Register
Timer B Output Compare 2 Low Register
00h
00h
xxxx x0xxb
xxh
xxh
80h
00h
FFh
FCh
FFh
FCh
xxh
xxh
80h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
0050h
0051h
0052h
0053h
0054h
0055h
0056h
0057h
SCI
SCISR
SCIDR
SCIBRR
SCICR1
SCICR2
SCIERPR
SCIETPR
SCI Status Register
SCI Data Register
SCI Baud Rate Register
SCI Control Register 1
SCI Control Register 2
SCI Extended Receive Prescaler Register
Reserved area
SCI Extended Transmit Prescaler Register
C0h
xxh
00h
x000 0000h
00h
00h
---
00h
Read Only
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0058h
to
006Fh
Reserved Area (24 Bytes)
0070h
0071h
0072h
ADC
ADCCSR
ADCDRH
ADCDRL
Control/Status Register
Data High Register
Data Low Register
00h
00h
00h
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
0073h
007Fh
Reserved Area (13 Bytes)
Address
Block
Register
Label
Register Name
Reset
Status
Remarks
ST72F324, ST72324B
16/164
Legend: x=undefined, R/W=read/write
Notes:
1. The contents of the I/O port DR registers are readable only in output configuration. In input configura-
tion, the values of the I/O pins are returned instead of the DR register contents.
2. The bits associated with unavailable pins must always keep their reset value.
3. The Timer A Input Capture 2 pin is not available (not bonded).
In Flash devices:
The TAIC2HR and TAIC2LR registers are not present. Bit 5 of the TACSR register (ICF2) is forced
by hardware to 0. Consequently, the corresponding interrupt cannot be used.
4. The Timer A Output Compare 2 pin is not available (not bonded).
In ROM devices:
The TAOC2HR and TAOC2LR Registers can be used in PWM mode or for timebase generation.
In Flash devices:
The TAOC2HR and TAOC2LR Registers are write only, reading them will return undefined values.
Bit 4 of the TACSR register (OCF2) is forced by hardware to 0. Consequently, the corresponding in-
terrupt cannot be used.
Caution: The TAIC2HR and TAIC2LR registers and the ICF2 and OCF2 flags are not present in the
ST72F324L but are present in the emulator. For compatibility with the emulator, it is recommended to per-
form a dummy access (read or write) to the TAIC2LR and TAOC2LR registers to clear the interrupt flags.
ST72F324, ST72324B
17/164
4 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
4.1 Introduction
The ST7 dual voltage High Density Flash
(HDFlash) is a non-volatile memory that can be
electrically erased as a single block or by individu-
al sectors and programmed on a Byte-by-Byte ba-
sis using an external V
PP
supply.
The HDFlash devices can be programmed and
erased off-board (plugged in a programming tool)
or on-board using ICP (In-Circuit Programming) or
IAP (In-Application Programming).
The array matrix organisation allows each sector
to be erased and reprogrammed without affecting
other sectors.
4.2 Main Features
s
Three Flash programming modes:
Insertion in a programming tool. In this mode,
all sectors including option bytes can be pro-
grammed or erased.
ICP (In-Circuit Programming). In this mode, all
sectors including option bytes can be pro-
grammed or erased without removing the de-
vice from the application board.
IAP (In-Application Programming) In this
mode, all sectors except Sector 0, can be pro-
grammed or erased without removing the de-
vice from the application board and while the
application is running.
s
ICT (In-Circuit Testing) for downloading and
executing user application test patterns in RAM
s
Read-out protection against piracy
s
Register Access Security System (RASS) to
prevent accidental programming or erasing
4.3 Structure
The Flash memory is organised in sectors and can
be used for both code and data storage.
Depending on the overall Flash memory size in the
microcontroller device, there are up to three user
sectors (see
Table 3
). Each of these sectors can
be erased independently to avoid unnecessary
erasing of the whole Flash memory when only a
partial erasing is required.
The first two sectors have a fixed size of 4 Kbytes
(see
Figure 6
). They are mapped in the upper part
of the ST7 addressing space so the reset and in-
terrupt vectors are located in Sector 0 (F000h-
FFFFh).
Table 3. Sectors available in Flash devices
4.3.1 Read-out Protection
Read-out protection, when selected, provides a
protection against Program Memory content ex-
traction and against write access to Flash memo-
ry. Even if no protection can be considered as to-
tally unbreakable, the feature provides a very high
level of protection for a general purpose microcon-
troller.
In flash devices, this protection is removed by re-
programming the option. In this case, the entire
program memory is first automatically erased.
Read-out protection selection depends on the de-
vice type:
In Flash devices it is enabled and removed
through the FMP_R bit in the option byte.
In ROM devices it is enabled by mask option
specified in the Option List.
Figure 6. Memory Map and Sector Address
Flash Size (bytes)
Available Sectors
4K
Sector 0
8K
Sectors 0,1
> 8K
Sectors 0,1, 2
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
2 Kbytes
SECTOR 1
SECTOR 0
16 Kbytes
SECTOR 2
8K
16K
32K
60K
FLASH
FFFFh
EFFFh
DFFFh
3FFFh
7FFFh
1000h
24 Kbytes
MEMORY SIZE
8 Kbytes
40 Kbytes 52 Kbytes
9FFFh
BFFFh
D7FFh
4K
10K
24K
48K
ST72F324, ST72324B
18/164
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (Cont'd)
4.4 ICC Interface
ICC needs a minimum of 4 and up to 6 pins to be
connected to the programming tool (see
Figure 7
).
These pins are:
RESET: device reset
V
SS
: device power supply ground
ICCCLK: ICC output serial clock pin
ICCDATA: ICC input/output serial data pin
ICCSEL/V
PP
: programming voltage
OSC1(or OSCIN): main clock input for exter-
nal source (optional)
V
DD
: application board power supply (option-
al, see
Figure 7
, Note 3)
Figure 7. Typical ICC Interface
Notes:
1. If the ICCCLK or ICCDATA pins are only used
as outputs in the application, no signal isolation is
necessary. As soon as the Programming Tool is
plugged to the board, even if an ICC session is not
in progress, the ICCCLK and ICCDATA pins are
not available for the application. If they are used as
inputs by the application, isolation such as a serial
resistor has to implemented in case another de-
vice forces the signal. Refer to the Programming
Tool documentation for recommended resistor val-
ues.
2. During the ICC session, the programming tool
must control the RESET pin. This can lead to con-
flicts between the programming tool and the appli-
cation reset circuit if it drives more than 5mA at
high level (push pull output or pull-up resistor<1K).
A schottky diode can be used to isolate the appli-
cation RESET circuit in this case. When using a
classical RC network with R>1K or a reset man-
agement IC with open drain output and pull-up re-
sistor>1K, no additional components are needed.
In all cases the user must ensure that no external
reset is generated by the application during the
ICC session.
3. The use of Pin 7 of the ICC connector depends
on the Programming Tool architecture. This pin
must be connected when using most ST Program-
ming Tools (it is used to monitor the application
power supply). Please refer to the Programming
Tool manual.
4. Pin 9 has to be connected to the OSC1 or OS-
CIN pin of the ST7 when the clock is not available
in the application or if the selected clock option is
not programmed in the option byte. ST7 devices
with multi-oscillator capability need to have OSC2
grounded in this case.
ICC CONNECTOR
IC
C
D
AT
A
IC
C
C
L
K
R
E
SET
V
DD
HE10 CONNECTOR TYPE
APPLICATION
POWER SUPPLY
1
2
4
6
8
10
9
7
5
3
PROGRAMMING TOOL
ICC CONNECTOR
APPLICATION BOARD
ICC Cable
(See Note 3)
10k
V
SS
IC
C
S
E
L
/
VPP
ST7
C
L2
C
L1
OS
C
1
OS
C
2
OPTIONAL
See Note 1
See Note 2
APPLICATION
RESET SOURCE
APPLICATION
I/O
(See Note 4)
ST72F324, ST72324B
19/164
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (Cont'd)
4.5 ICP (In-Circuit Programming)
To perform ICP the microcontroller must be
switched to ICC (In-Circuit Communication) mode
by an external controller or programming tool.
Depending on the ICP code downloaded in RAM,
Flash memory programming can be fully custom-
ized (number of bytes to program, program loca-
tions, or selection serial communication interface
for downloading).
When using an STMicroelectronics or third-party
programming tool that supports ICP and the spe-
cific microcontroller device, the user needs only to
implement the ICP hardware interface on the ap-
plication board (see
Figure 7
). For more details on
the pin locations, refer to the device pinout de-
scription.
4.6 IAP (In-Application Programming)
This mode uses a BootLoader program previously
stored in Sector 0 by the user (in ICP mode or by
plugging the device in a programming tool).
This mode is fully controlled by user software. This
allows it to be adapted to the user application, (us-
er-defined strategy for entering programming
mode, choice of communications protocol used to
fetch the data to be stored, etc.). For example, it is
possible to download code from the SPI, SCI, USB
or CAN interface and program it in the Flash. IAP
mode can be used to program any of the Flash
sectors except Sector 0, which is write/erase pro-
tected to allow recovery in case errors occur dur-
ing the programming operation.
4.7 Related Documentation
For details on Flash programming and ICC proto-
col, refer to the ST7 Flash Programming Refer-
ence Manual and to the ST7 ICC Protocol Refer-
ence Manual
.
4.7.1 Register Description
FLASH CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (FCSR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This register is reserved for use by Programming
Tool software. It controls the Flash programming
and erasing operations.
Table 4. Flash Control/Status Register Address and Reset Value
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0029h
FCSR
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
20/164
5 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This CPU has a full 8-bit architecture and contains
six internal registers allowing efficient 8-bit data
manipulation.
5.2 MAIN FEATURES
s
Enable executing 63 basic instructions
s
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply
s
17 main addressing modes (with indirect
addressing mode)
s
Two 8-bit index registers
s
16-bit stack pointer
s
Low power HALT and WAIT modes
s
Priority maskable hardware interrupts
s
Non-maskable software/hardware interrupts
5.3 CPU REGISTERS
The 6 CPU registers shown in
Figure 8
are not
present in the memory mapping and are accessed
by specific instructions.
Accumulator (A)
The Accumulator is an 8-bit general purpose reg-
ister used to hold operands and the results of the
arithmetic and logic calculations and to manipulate
data.
Index Registers (X and Y)
These 8-bit registers are used to create effective
addresses or as temporary storage areas for data
manipulation. (The Cross-Assembler generates a
precede instruction (PRE) to indicate that the fol-
lowing instruction refers to the Y register.)
The Y register is not affected by the interrupt auto-
matic procedures.
Program Counter (PC)
The program counter is a 16-bit register containing
the address of the next instruction to be executed
by the CPU. It is made of two 8-bit registers PCL
(Program Counter Low which is the LSB) and PCH
(Program Counter High which is the MSB).
Figure 8. CPU Registers
ACCUMULATOR
X INDEX REGISTER
Y INDEX REGISTER
STACK POINTER
CONDITION CODE REGISTER
PROGRAM COUNTER
7
0
1
C
1 I1 H I0 N Z
RESET VALUE = RESET VECTOR @ FFFEh-FFFFh
7
0
7
0
7
0
0
7
15
8
PCH
PCL
15
8
7
0
RESET VALUE = STACK HIGHER ADDRESS
RESET VALUE = 1
X
1 1 X 1 X X
RESET VALUE = XXh
RESET VALUE = XXh
RESET VALUE = XXh
X = Undefined Value
ST72F324, ST72324B
21/164
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont'd)
Condition Code Register (CC)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 111x1xxx
The 8-bit Condition Code register contains the in-
terrupt masks
and four flags representative of the
result of the instruction just executed. This register
can also be handled by the PUSH and POP in-
structions.
These bits can be individually tested and/or con-
trolled by specific instructions.
Arithmetic Management Bits
Bit 4 = H Half carry.
This bit is set by hardware when a carry occurs be-
tween bits 3 and 4 of the ALU during an ADD or
ADC instructions. It is reset by hardware during
the same instructions.
0: No half carry has occurred.
1: A half carry has occurred.
This bit is tested using the JRH or JRNH instruc-
tion. The H bit is useful in BCD arithmetic subrou-
tines.
Bit 2 = N Negative.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is repre-
sentative of the result sign of the last arithmetic,
logical or data manipulation. It's a copy of the re-
sult 7
th
bit.
0: The result of the last operation is positive or null.
1: The result of the last operation is negative
(i.e. the most significant bit is a logic 1).
This bit is accessed by the JRMI and JRPL instruc-
tions.
Bit 1 = Z Zero.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. This bit in-
dicates that the result of the last arithmetic, logical
or data manipulation is zero.
0: The result of the last operation is different from
zero.
1: The result of the last operation is zero.
This bit is accessed by the JREQ and JRNE test
instructions.
Bit 0 = C Carry/borrow.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware and soft-
ware. It indicates an overflow or an underflow has
occurred during the last arithmetic operation.
0: No overflow or underflow has occurred.
1: An overflow or underflow has occurred.
This bit is driven by the SCF and RCF instructions
and tested by the JRC and JRNC instructions. It is
also affected by the "bit test and branch", shift and
rotate instructions.
Interrupt Management Bits
Bit 5,3 = I1, I0 Interrupt
The combination of the I1 and I0 bits gives the cur-
rent interrupt software priority.
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when
entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by
the corresponding bits in the interrupt software pri-
ority registers (IxSPR). They can be also set/
cleared by software with the RIM, SIM, IRET,
HALT, WFI and PUSH/POP instructions.
See the interrupt management chapter for more
details.
7
0
1
1
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
Interrupt Software Priority
I1
I0
Level 0 (main)
1
0
Level 1
0
1
Level 2
0
0
Level 3 (= interrupt disable)
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
22/164
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont'd)
Stack Pointer (SP)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 01 FFh
The Stack Pointer is a 16-bit register which is al-
ways pointing to the next free location in the stack.
It is then decremented after data has been pushed
onto the stack and incremented before data is
popped from the stack (see
Figure 9
).
Since the stack is 256 bytes deep, the 8 most sig-
nificant bits are forced by hardware. Following an
MCU Reset, or after a Reset Stack Pointer instruc-
tion (RSP), the Stack Pointer contains its reset val-
ue (the SP7 to SP0 bits are set) which is the stack
higher address.
The least significant byte of the Stack Pointer
(called S) can be directly accessed by a LD in-
struction.
Note: When the lower limit is exceeded, the Stack
Pointer wraps around to the stack upper limit, with-
out indicating the stack overflow. The previously
stored information is then overwritten and there-
fore lost. The stack also wraps in case of an under-
flow.
The stack is used to save the return address dur-
ing a subroutine call and the CPU context during
an interrupt. The user may also directly manipulate
the stack by means of the PUSH and POP instruc-
tions. In the case of an interrupt, the PCL is stored
at the first location pointed to by the SP. Then the
other registers are stored in the next locations as
shown in
Figure 9
.
When an interrupt is received, the SP is decre-
mented and the context is pushed on the stack.
On return from interrupt, the SP is incremented
and the context is popped from the stack.
A subroutine call occupies two locations and an in-
terrupt five locations in the stack area.
Figure 9. Stack Manipulation Example
15
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
7
0
SP7
SP6
SP5
SP4
SP3
SP2
SP1
SP0
PCH
PCL
SP
PCH
PCL
SP
PCL
PCH
X
A
CC
PCH
PCL
SP
PCL
PCH
X
A
CC
PCH
PCL
SP
PCL
PCH
X
A
CC
PCH
PCL
SP
SP
Y
CALL
Subroutine
Interrupt
Event
PUSH Y
POP Y
IRET
RET
or RSP
@ 01FFh
@ 0100h
Stack Higher Address = 01FFh
Stack Lower Address = 0100h
ST72F324, ST72324B
23/164
6 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT
The device includes a range of utility features for
securing the application in critical situations (for
example in case of a power brown-out), and re-
ducing the number of external components. An
overview is shown in
Figure 11
.
For more details, refer to dedicated parametric
section.
Main features
s
Optional PLL for multiplying the frequency by 2
(not to be used with internal RC oscillator in
order to respect the max. operating frequency)
s
Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)
s
Multi-Oscillator Clock Management (MO)
5 Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators
1 Internal RC oscillator
s
System Integrity Management (SI)
Main supply Low voltage detection (LVD)
Auxiliary Voltage detector (AVD) with interrupt
capability for monitoring the main supply
Clock Security System (CSS) with Clock Filter
and Backup Safe Oscillator (enabled by op-
tion byte)
6.1 PHASE LOCKED LOOP
If the clock frequency input to the PLL is in the
range 2 to 4 MHz, the PLL can be used to multiply
the frequency by two to obtain an f
OSC2
of 4 to 8
MHz. The PLL is enabled by option byte. If the PLL
is disabled, then f
OSC2 =
f
OSC
/2.
Caution: The PLL is not recommended for appli-
cations where timing accuracy is required.
Caution: The PLL must not be used with the inter-
nal RC oscillator.
Figure 10. PLL Block Diagram
Figure 11. Clock, Reset and Supply Block Diagram
0
1
PLL OPTION BIT
PLL x 2
f
OSC2
/ 2
f
OSC
LOW VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
(LVD)
f
OSC2
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
(AVD)
MULTI-
OSCILLATOR
(MO)
OSC1
RESET
V
SS
V
DD
RESET SEQUENCE
MANAGER
(RSM)
CLOCK
FILTER
SAFE
OSC
CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM
(CSS)
OSC2
MAIN CLOCK
CSS Interrupt Request
AVD Interrupt Request
CONTROLLER
PLL
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT
WATCHDOG
SICSR
TIMER (WDG)
WITH REALTIME
CLOCK (MCC/RTC)
AVD AVD LVD
RF
CSS
IE
IE
CSS
D
WDG
RF
f
OSC
f
OSC2
(option)
0
0
F
f
CPU
ST72F324, ST72324B
24/164
6.2 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO)
The main clock of the ST7 can be generated by
three different source types coming from the multi-
oscillator block:
s
an external source
s
4 crystal or ceramic resonator oscillators
s
an internal high frequency RC oscillator
Each oscillator is optimized for a given frequency
range in terms of consumption and is selectable
through the option byte. The associated hardware
configurations are shown in
Table 5
. Refer to the
electrical characteristics section for more details.
Caution: The OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins must not
be left unconnected. For the purposes of Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis, it should be noted that if
the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins are left unconnected,
the ST7 main oscillator may start and, in this con-
figuration, could generate an f
OSC
clock frequency
in excess of the allowed maximum (>16MHz.),
putting the ST7 in an unsafe/undefined state. The
product behaviour must therefore be considered
undefined when the OSC pins are left unconnect-
ed.
External Clock Source
In this external clock mode, a clock signal (square,
sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive
the OSC1 pin while the OSC2 pin is tied to ground.
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillators
This family of oscillators has the advantage of pro-
ducing a very accurate rate on the main clock of
the ST7. The selection within a list of 4 oscillators
with different frequency ranges has to be done by
option byte in order to reduce consumption (refer
to
Section 14.1 on page 151
for more details on
the frequency ranges). In this mode of the multi-
oscillator, the resonator and the load capacitors
have to be placed as close as possible to the oscil-
lator pins in order to minimize output distortion and
start-up stabilization time. The loading capaci-
tance values must be adjusted according to the
selected oscillator.
These oscillators are not stopped during the
RESET phase to avoid losing time in the oscillator
start-up phase.
Internal RC Oscillator
This oscillator allows a low cost solution for the
main clock of the ST7 using only an internal resis-
tor and capacitor. Internal RC oscillator mode has
the drawback of a lower frequency accuracy and
should not be used in applications that require ac-
curate timing.
In this mode, the two oscillator pins have to be tied
to ground.
In order not to exceed the the max. operating fre-
quency, the internal RC oscillator must not be
used with the PLL.
Table 5. ST7 Clock Sources
Hardware Configuration
Ex
ternal
Clock
Cr
ystal/C
eram
ic
Re
sonat
ors
Inte
rnal
R
C
Os
cillato
r
OSC1
OSC2
EXTERNAL
ST7
SOURCE
OSC1
OSC2
LOAD
CAPACITORS
ST7
C
L2
C
L1
OSC1
OSC2
ST7
ST72F324, ST72324B
25/164
6.3 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM)
6.3.1 Introduction
The reset sequence manager includes three RE-
SET sources as shown in
Figure 13
:
s
External RESET source pulse
s
Internal LVD RESET (Low Voltage Detection)
s
Internal WATCHDOG RESET
These sources act on the RESET pin and it is al-
ways kept low during the delay phase.
The RESET service routine vector is fixed at ad-
dresses FFFEh-FFFFh in the ST7 memory map.
The basic RESET sequence consists of 3 phases
as shown in
Figure 12
:
s
Active Phase depending on the RESET source
s
256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay (selected by
option byte)
s
RESET vector fetch
The 256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay allows the
oscillator to stabilise and ensures that recovery
has taken place from the Reset state. The shorter
or longer clock cycle delay should be selected by
option byte to correspond to the stabilization time
of the external oscillator used in the application.
The RESET vector fetch phase duration is 2 clock
cycles.
Figure 12. RESET Sequence Phases
6.3.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin
The RESET pin is both an input and an open-drain
output with integrated R
ON
weak pull-up resistor.
This pull-up has no fixed value but varies in ac-
cordance with the input voltage. It
can be pulled
low by external circuitry to reset the device. See
Electrical Characteristic section for more details.
A RESET signal originating from an external
source must have a duration of at least t
h(RSTL)in
in
order to be recognized (see
Figure 14
). This de-
tection is asynchronous and therefore the MCU
can enter reset state even in HALT mode.
Figure 13. Reset Block Diagram
RESET
Active Phase
INTERNAL RESET
256 or 4096 CLOCK CYCLES
FETCH
VECTOR
RESET
R
ON
V
DD
WATCHDOG RESET
LVD RESET
INTERNAL
RESET
PULSE
GENERATOR
Filter
ST72F324, ST72324B
26/164
RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (Cont'd)
The RESET pin is an asynchronous signal which
plays a major role in EMS performance. In a noisy
environment, it is recommended to follow the
guidelines mentioned in the electrical characteris-
tics section.
6.3.3 External Power-On RESET
If the LVD is disabled by option byte, to start up the
microcontroller correctly, the user must ensure by
means of an external reset circuit that the reset
signal is held low until V
DD
is over the minimum
level specified for the selected f
OSC
frequency.
A proper reset signal for a slow rising V
DD
supply
can generally be provided by an external RC net-
work connected to the RESET pin.
6.3.4 Internal Low Voltage Detector (LVD)
RESET
Two different RESET sequences caused by the in-
ternal LVD circuitry can be distinguished:
s
Power-On RESET
s
Voltage Drop RESET
The device RESET pin acts as an output that is
pulled low when V
DD
<V
IT+
(rising edge) or
V
DD
<V
IT-
(falling edge) as shown in
Figure 14
.
The LVD filters spikes on V
DD
larger than t
g(VDD)
to
avoid parasitic resets.
6.3.5 Internal Watchdog RESET
The RESET sequence generated by a internal
Watchdog counter overflow is shown in
Figure 14
.
Starting from the Watchdog counter underflow, the
device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled
low during at least t
w(RSTL)out
.
Figure 14. RESET Sequences
V
DD
RUN
RESET PIN
EXTERNAL
WATCHDOG
ACTIVE PHASE
V
IT+(LVD)
V
IT-(LVD)
t
h(RSTL)in
RUN
WATCHDOG UNDERFLOW
t
w(RSTL)out
RUN
RUN
RESET
RESET
SOURCE
EXTERNAL
RESET
LVD
RESET
WATCHDOG
RESET
INTERNAL RESET (256 or 4096 T
CPU
)
VECTOR FETCH
ACTIVE
PHASE
ACTIVE
PHASE
ST72F324, ST72324B
27/164
6.4 SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (SI)
The System Integrity Management block contains
the Low Voltage Detector (LVD), Auxiliary Voltage
Detector (AVD) functions and Clock Security Sys-
tem (CSS). It is managed by the SICSR register.
6.4.1 Low Voltage Detector (LVD)
The Low Voltage Detector function (LVD) gener-
ates a static reset when the V
DD
supply voltage is
below a V
IT-
reference value. This means that it
secures the power-up as well as the power-down
keeping the ST7 in reset.
The V
IT-
reference value for a voltage drop is lower
than the V
IT+
reference value for power-on in order
to avoid a parasitic reset when the MCU starts run-
ning and sinks current on the supply (hysteresis).
The LVD Reset circuitry generates a reset when
V
DD
is below:
V
IT+
when V
DD
is rising
V
IT-
when V
DD
is falling
The LVD function is illustrated in
Figure 15
.
The voltage threshold can be configured by option
byte to be low, medium or high.
Provided the minimum V
DD
value (guaranteed for
the oscillator frequency) is above V
IT-
, the MCU
can only be in two modes:
under full software control
in static safe reset
In these conditions, secure operation is always en-
sured for the application without the need for ex-
ternal reset hardware.
During a Low Voltage Detector Reset, the RESET
pin is held low, thus permitting the MCU to reset
other devices.
Notes:
The LVD allows the device to be used without any
external RESET circuitry.
If the medium or low thresholds are selected, the
detection may occur outside the specified operat-
ing voltage range. Below 3.8V, device operation is
not guaranteed.
The LVD is an optional function which can be se-
lected by option byte.
It is recommended to make sure that the V
DD
sup-
ply voltage rises monotonously when the device is
exiting from Reset, to ensure the application func-
tions properly.
Figure 15. Low Voltage Detector vs Reset
V
DD
V
IT+
RESET
V
IT-
V
hys
ST72F324, ST72324B
28/164
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)
6.4.2 Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD)
The Voltage Detector function (AVD) is based on
an analog comparison between a V
IT-(AVD)
and
V
IT+(AVD)
reference value and the V
DD
main sup-
ply. The V
IT-
reference value for falling voltage is
lower than the V
IT+
reference value for rising volt-
age in order to avoid parasitic detection (hystere-
sis).
The output of the AVD comparator is directly read-
able by the application software through a real
time status bit (AVDF) in the SICSR register. This
bit is read only.
Caution: The AVD function is active only if the
LVD is enabled through the option byte (see
Sec-
tion 14.1 on page 151
).
6.4.2.1 Monitoring the V
DD
Main Supply
The AVD voltage threshold value is relative to the
selected LVD threshold configured by option byte
(see
If the AVD interrupt is enabled, an interrupt is gen-
erated when the voltage crosses the V
IT+(AVD)
or
V
IT-(AVD)
threshold (AVDF bit toggles).
In the case of a drop in voltage, the AVD interrupt
acts as an early warning, allowing software to shut
down safely before the LVD resets the microcon-
troller. See
Figure 16
.
The interrupt on the rising edge is used to inform
the application that the V
DD
warning state is over.
If the voltage rise time t
rv
is less than 256 or 4096
CPU cycles (depending on the reset delay select-
ed by option byte), no AVD interrupt will be gener-
ated when V
IT+(AVD)
is reached.
If t
rv
is greater than 256 or 4096 cycles then:
If the AVD interrupt is enabled before the
V
IT+(AVD)
threshold is reached, then 2 AVD inter-
rupts will be received: the first when the AVDIE
bit is set, and the second when the threshold is
reached.
If the AVD interrupt is enabled after the V
IT+(AVD)
threshold is reached then only one AVD interrupt
will occur.
Figure 16. Using the AVD to Monitor V
DD
V
DD
V
IT+(AVD)
V
IT-(AVD)
AVDF bit
0
0
RESET VALUE
IF AVDIE bit = 1
V
hyst
AVD INTERRUPT
REQUEST
INTERRUPT PROCESS
INTERRUPT PROCESS
V
IT+(LVD)
V
IT-(LVD)
LVD RESET
Early Warning Interrupt
(Power has dropped, MCU not
not yet in reset)
1
1
t
rv
VOLTAGE RISE TIME
ST72F324, ST72324B
29/164
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)
6.4.3 Clock Security System (CSS)
The Clock Security System (CSS) protects the
ST7 against breakdowns, spikes and overfrequen-
cies occurring on the main clock source (f
OSC
). It
is based on a clock filter and a clock detection con-
trol with an internal safe oscillator (f
SFOSC
).
Caution: The CSS function is not guaranteed in
the current silicon revision. See "KNOWN LIMITA-
TIONS" on page 161.
6.4.3.1 Clock Filter Control
The PLL has an integrated glitch filtering capability
making it possible to protect the internal clock from
overfrequencies created by individual spikes. This
feature is available only when the PLL is enabled.
If glitches occur on f
OSC
(for example, due to loose
connection or noise), the CSS filters these auto-
matically, so the internal CPU frequency (f
CPU
)
continues deliver a glitch-free signal (s
ee Figure
17)
.
6.4.3.2 Clock detection Control
If the clock signal disappears (due to a broken or
disconnected resonator...), the safe oscillator de-
livers a low frequency clock signal (f
SFOSC
) which
allows the ST7 to perform some rescue opera-
tions.
Automatically, the ST7 clock source switches back
from the safe oscillator (f
SFOSC
) if the main clock
source (f
OSC
) recovers.
When the internal clock (f
CPU
) is driven by the safe
oscillator (f
SFOSC
), the application software is noti-
fied by hardware setting the CSSD bit in the SIC-
SR register. An interrupt can be generated if the
CSSIE bit has been previously set.
These two bits are described in the SICSR register
description.
6.4.4 Low Power Modes
6.4.4.1 Interrupts
The CSS or AVD interrupt events generate an in-
terrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit
(CSSIE or AVDIE) is set and the interrupt mask in
the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
Figure 17. Clock Filter Function
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on SI. CSS and AVD interrupts
cause the device to exit from Wait mode.
HALT
The CRSR register is frozen.
The CSS (including the safe oscillator) is
disabled until HALT mode is exited. The
previous CSS configuration resumes when
the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with
"exit from HALT mode" capability or from
the counter reset value when the MCU is
woken up by a RESET.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
CSS event detection
(safe oscillator acti-
vated as main clock)
CSSD
CSSIE
Yes
No
AVD event
AVDF
AVDIE
Yes
No
f
OSC2
f
CPU
f
OSC2
f
CPU
f
SFOSC
P
LL O
N
Clock Filter Function
Clock Detection Function
ST72F324, ST72324B
30/164
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)
6.4.5 Register Description
SYSTEM INTEGRITY (SI) CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (SICSR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 000x 000x (00h)
Bit 6 = AVDIE Voltage Detector interrupt enable
This bit is set and cleared by software. It enables
an interrupt to be generated when the AVDF flag
changes (toggles). The pending interrupt informa-
tion is automatically cleared when software enters
the AVD interrupt routine.
0: AVD interrupt disabled
1: AVD interrupt enabled
Bit 5 = AVDF Voltage Detector flag
This read-only bit is set and cleared by hardware.
If the AVDIE bit is set, an interrupt request is gen-
erated when the AVDF bit changes value. Refer to
Figure 16
and to
Section 6.4.2.1
for additional de-
tails.
0: V
DD
over V
IT+(AVD)
threshold
1: V
DD
under V
IT-(AVD)
threshold
Bit 4 = LVDRF LVD reset flag
This bit indicates that the last Reset was generat-
ed by the LVD block. It is set by hardware (LVD re-
set) and cleared by software (writing zero). See
WDGRF flag description for more details. When
the LVD is disabled by OPTION BYTE, the LVDRF
bit value is undefined.
Bits 3 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 2 = CSSIE Clock security syst
.
interrupt enable
This bit enables the interrupt when a disturbance
is detected by the Clock Security System (CSSD
bit set). It is set and cleared by software.
0: Clock security system interrupt disabled
1: Clock security system interrupt enabled
When the CSS is disabled by OPTION BYTE, the
CSSIE bit has no effect.
Bit 1 = CSSD Clock security system detection
This bit indicates that the safe oscillator of the
Clock Security System block has been selected by
hardware due to a disturbance on the main clock
signal (f
OSC
). It is set by hardware and cleared by
reading the SICSR register when the original oscil-
lator recovers.
0: Safe oscillator is not active
1: Safe oscillator has been activated
When the CSS is disabled by OPTION BYTE, the
CSSD bit value is forced to 0.
Bit 0 = WDGRF Watchdog reset flag
This bit indicates that the last Reset was generat-
ed by the Watchdog peripheral. It is set by hard-
ware (watchdog reset) and cleared by software
(writing zero) or an LVD Reset (to ensure a stable
cleared state of the WDGRF flag when CPU
starts).
Combined with the LVDRF flag information, the
flag description is given by the following table.
Application notes
The LVDRF flag is not cleared when another RE-
SET type occurs (external or watchdog), the
LVDRF flag remains set to keep trace of the origi-
nal failure.
In this case, a watchdog reset can be detected by
software while an external reset can not.
CAUTION: When the LVD is not activated with the
associated option byte, the WDGRF flag can not
be used in the application.
7
0
AVD
IE
AVD
F
LVD
RF
0
CSS
IE
CSS
D
WDG
RF
RESET Sources
LVDRF
WDGRF
External RESET pin
0
0
Watchdog
0
1
LVD
1
X
ST72F324, ST72324B
31/164
7 INTERRUPTS
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST7 enhanced interrupt management pro-
vides the following features:
s
Hardware interrupts
s
Software interrupt (TRAP)
s
Nested or concurrent interrupt management
with flexible interrupt priority and level
management:
Up to 4 software programmable nesting levels
Up to 16 interrupt vectors fixed by hardware
2 non maskable events: RESET, TRAP
This interrupt management is based on:
Bit 5 and bit 3 of the CPU CC register (I1:0),
Interrupt software priority registers (ISPRx),
Fixed interrupt vector addresses located at the
high addresses of the memory map (FFE0h to
FFFFh) sorted by hardware priority order.
This enhanced interrupt controller guarantees full
upward compatibility with the standard (not nest-
ed) ST7 interrupt controller.
7.2 MASKING AND PROCESSING FLOW
The interrupt masking is managed by the I1 and I0
bits of the CC register and the ISPRx registers
which give the interrupt software priority level of
each interrupt vector (see
Table 6
). The process-
ing flow is shown in
Figure 18
When an interrupt request has to be serviced:
Normal processing is suspended at the end of
the current instruction execution.
The PC, X, A and CC registers are saved onto
the stack.
I1 and I0 bits of CC register are set according to
the corresponding values in the ISPRx registers
of the serviced interrupt vector.
The PC is then loaded with the interrupt vector of
the interrupt to service and the first instruction of
the interrupt service routine is fetched (refer to
"Interrupt Mapping" table for vector addresses).
The interrupt service routine should end with the
IRET instruction which causes the contents of the
saved registers to be recovered from the stack.
Note: As a consequence of the IRET instruction,
the I1 and I0 bits will be restored from the stack
and the program in the previous level will resume.
Table 6. Interrupt Software Priority Levels
Figure 18. Interrupt Processing Flowchart
Interrupt software priority
Level
I1
I0
Level 0 (main)
Low
High
1
0
Level 1
0
1
Level 2
0
0
Level 3 (= interrupt disable)
1
1
"IRET"
RESTORE PC, X, A, CC
STACK PC, X, A, CC
LOAD I1:0 FROM INTERRUPT SW REG.
FETCH NEXT
RESET
TRAP
PENDING
INSTRUCTION
I1:0
FROM STACK
LOAD PC FROM INTERRUPT VECTOR
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Interrupt has the same or a
lower software priority
THE INTERRUPT
STAYS PENDING
than current one
I
n
t
e
r
r
up
t
h
as
a
h
i
ghe
r
so
ftw
a
r
e
p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y
t
han
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
o
ne
EXECUTE
INSTRUCTION
INTERRUPT
ST72F324, ST72324B
32/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
Servicing Pending Interrupts
As several interrupts can be pending at the same
time, the interrupt to be taken into account is deter-
mined by the following two-step process:
the highest software priority interrupt is serviced,
if several interrupts have the same software pri-
ority then the interrupt with the highest hardware
priority is serviced first.
Figure 19
describes this decision process.
Figure 19. Priority Decision Process
When an interrupt request is not serviced immedi-
ately, it is latched and then processed when its
software priority combined with the hardware pri-
ority becomes the highest one.
Note 1: The hardware priority is exclusive while
the software one is not. This allows the previous
process to succeed with only one interrupt.
Note 2: RESET and TRAP can be considered as
having the highest software priority in the decision
process.
Different Interrupt Vector Sources
Two interrupt source types are managed by the
ST7 interrupt controller: the non-maskable type
(RESET,TRAP) and the maskable type (external
or from internal peripherals).
Non-Maskable Sources
These sources are processed regardless of the
state of the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register (see
Figure 18
). After stacking the PC, X, A and CC
registers (except for RESET), the corresponding
vector is loaded in the PC register and the I1 and
I0 bits of the CC are set to disable interrupts (level
3). These sources allow the processor to exit
HALT mode.
s
TRAP (Non Maskable Software Interrupt)
This software interrupt is serviced when the TRAP
instruction is executed. It will be serviced accord-
ing to the flowchart in
Figure 18
.
s
RESET
The RESET source has the highest priority in the
ST7. This means that the first current routine has
the highest software priority (level 3) and the high-
est hardware priority.
See the RESET chapter for more details.
Maskable Sources
Maskable interrupt vector sources can be serviced
if the corresponding interrupt is enabled and if its
own interrupt software priority (in ISPRx registers)
is higher than the one currently being serviced (I1
and I0 in CC register). If any of these two condi-
tions is false, the interrupt is latched and thus re-
mains pending.
s
External Interrupts
External interrupts allow the processor to exit from
HALT low power mode. External interrupt sensitiv-
ity is software selectable through the External In-
terrupt Control register (EICR).
External interrupt triggered on edge will be latched
and the interrupt request automatically cleared
upon entering the interrupt service routine.
If several input pins of a group connected to the
same interrupt line are selected simultaneously,
these will be logically ORed.
s
Peripheral Interrupts
Usually the peripheral interrupts cause the MCU to
exit from HALT mode except those mentioned in
the "Interrupt Mapping" table. A peripheral inter-
rupt occurs when a specific flag is set in the pe-
ripheral status registers and if the corresponding
enable bit is set in the peripheral control register.
The general sequence for clearing an interrupt is
based on an access to the status register followed
by a read or write to an associated register.
Note: The clearing sequence resets the internal
latch. A pending interrupt (i.e. waiting for being
serviced) will therefore be lost if the clear se-
quence is executed.
PENDING
SOFTWARE
Different
INTERRUPTS
Same
HIGHEST HARDWARE
PRIORITY SERVICED
PRIORITY
HIGHEST SOFTWARE
PRIORITY SERVICED
ST72F324, ST72324B
33/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
7.3 INTERRUPTS AND LOW POWER MODES
All interrupts allow the processor to exit the WAIT
low power mode. On the contrary, only external
and other specified interrupts allow the processor
to exit from the HALT modes (see column "Exit
from HALT" in "Interrupt Mapping" table). When
several pending interrupts are present while exit-
ing HALT mode, the first one serviced can only be
an interrupt with exit from HALT mode capability
and it is selected through the same decision proc-
ess shown in
Figure 19
.
Note: If an interrupt, that is not able to Exit from
HALT mode, is pending with the highest priority
when exiting HALT mode, this interrupt is serviced
after the first one serviced.
7.4 CONCURRENT & NESTED MANAGEMENT
The following
Figure 20
and
Figure 21
show two
different interrupt management modes. The first is
called concurrent mode and does not allow an in-
terrupt to be interrupted, unlike the nested mode in
Figure 21
. The interrupt hardware priority is given
in this order from the lowest to the highest: MAIN,
IT4, IT3, IT2, IT1, IT0. The software priority is giv-
en for each interrupt.
Warning: A stack overflow may occur without no-
tifying the software of the failure.
Figure 20. Concurrent Interrupt Management
Figure 21. Nested Interrupt Management
MAIN
IT4
IT2
IT1
TRAP
IT1
MAIN
IT0
I1
HA
RD
WA
RE
P
R
I
O
RIT
Y
SOFTWARE
3
3
3
3
3
3/0
3
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
11 / 10
1 1
RIM
IT
2
IT
1
IT
4
TR
AP
IT
3
IT0
IT3
I0
10
PRIORITY
LEVEL
US
ED
S
T
ACK
=
10
BYT
ES
MAIN
IT2
TRAP
MAIN
IT0
IT2
IT1
IT4
TRA
P
IT3
IT
0
HA
RDWA
R
E
P
R
IO
RIT
Y
3
2
1
3
3
3/0
3
1 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
RIM
IT1
IT4
IT4
IT1
IT2
IT3
I1
I0
11 / 10
10
SOFTWARE
PRIORITY
LEVEL
USE
D
ST
ACK
=
20
B
Y
TE
S
ST72F324, ST72324B
34/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
7.5 INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION
CPU CC REGISTER INTERRUPT BITS
Read /Write
Reset Value: 111x 1010 (xAh)
Bit 5, 3 = I1, I0 Software Interrupt Priority
These two bits indicate the current interrupt soft-
ware priority.
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when
entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by
the corresponding bits in the interrupt software pri-
ority registers (ISPRx).
They can be also set/cleared by software with the
RIM, SIM, HALT, WFI, IRET and PUSH/POP in-
structions (see "Interrupt Dedicated Instruction
Set" table).
*Note: TRAP and RESET events can interrupt a
level 3 program.
INTERRUPT SOFTWARE PRIORITY REGIS-
TERS (ISPRX)
Read/Write (bit 7:4 of ISPR3 are read only)
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
These four registers contain the interrupt software
priority of each interrupt vector.
Each interrupt vector (except RESET and TRAP)
has corresponding bits in these registers where
its own software priority is stored. This corre-
spondance is shown in the following table.
Each I1_x and I0_x bit value in the ISPRx regis-
ters has the same meaning as the I1 and I0 bits
in the CC register.
Level 0 can not be written (I1_x=1, I0_x=0). In
this case, the previously stored value is kept. (ex-
ample: previous=CFh, write=64h, result=44h)
The RESET, and TRAP vectors have no software
priorities. When one is serviced, the I1 and I0 bits
of the CC register are both set.
Caution: If the I1_x and I0_x bits are modified
while the interrupt x is executed the following be-
haviour has to be considered: If the interrupt x is
still pending (new interrupt or flag not cleared) and
the new software priority is higher than the previ-
ous one, the interrupt x is re-entered. Otherwise,
the software priority stays unchanged up to the
next interrupt request (after the IRET of the inter-
rupt x).
7
0
1
1
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
Interrupt Software Priority
Level
I1
I0
Level 0 (main)
Low
High
1
0
Level 1
0
1
Level 2
0
0
Level 3 (= interrupt disable*)
1
1
7
0
ISPR0
I1_3
I0_3
I1_2
I0_2
I1_1
I0_1
I1_0
I0_0
ISPR1
I1_7
I0_7
I1_6
I0_6
I1_5
I0_5
I1_4
I0_4
ISPR2
I1_11 I0_11 I1_10 I0_10 I1_9
I0_9
I1_8
I0_8
ISPR3
1
1
1
1
I1_13 I0_13 I1_12 I0_12
Vector address
ISPRx bits
FFFBh-FFFAh
I1_0 and I0_0 bits*
FFF9h-FFF8h
I1_1 and I0_1 bits
...
...
FFE1h-FFE0h
I1_13 and I0_13 bits
ST72F324, ST72324B
35/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
Table 7. Dedicated Interrupt Instruction Set
Note: During the execution of an interrupt routine, the HALT, POPCC, RIM, SIM and WFI instructions change the current
software priority up to the next IRET instruction or one of the previously mentioned instructions.
Instruction
New Description
Function/Example
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
HALT
Entering Halt mode
1
0
IRET
Interrupt routine return
Pop CC, A, X, PC
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
JRM
Jump if I1:0=11 (level 3)
I1:0=11 ?
JRNM
Jump if I1:0<>11
I1:0<>11 ?
POP CC
Pop CC from the Stack
Mem => CC
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
RIM
Enable interrupt (level 0 set)
Load 10 in I1:0 of CC
1
0
SIM
Disable interrupt (level 3 set)
Load 11 in I1:0 of CC
1
1
TRAP
Software trap
Software NMI
1
1
WFI
Wait for interrupt
1
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
36/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
Table 8. Interrupt Mapping
Notes:
1. Valid for HALT and ACTIVE-HALT modes except for the MCC/RTC or CSS interrupt source which exits
from ACTIVE-HALT mode only.
7.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS
7.6.1 I/O Port Interrupt Sensitivity
The external interrupt sensitivity is controlled by
the IPA, IPB and ISxx bits of the EICR register
(
Figure 22
). This control allows to have up to 4 fully
independent external interrupt source sensitivities.
Each external interrupt source can be generated
on four (or five) different events on the pin:
s
Falling edge
s
Rising edge
s
Falling and rising edge
s
Falling edge and low level
s
Rising edge and high level (only for ei0 and ei2)
To guarantee correct functionality, the sensitivity
bits in the EICR register can be modified only
when the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register are both
set to 1 (level 3). This means that interrupts must
be disabled before changing sensitivity.
The pending interrupts are cleared by writing a dif-
ferent value in the ISx[1:0], IPA or IPB bits of the
EICR.
N
Source
Block
Description
Register
Label
Priority
Order
Exit
from
HALT
1)
Address
Vector
RESET
Reset
N/A
yes
FFFEh-FFFFh
TRAP
Software interrupt
no
FFFCh-FFFDh
0
Not used
FFFAh-FFFBh
1
MCC/RTC
CSS
Main clock controller time base interrupt
Safe oscillator activation interrupt
MCCSR
SICSR
Higher
Priority
yes
FFF8h-FFF9h
2
ei0
External interrupt port A3..0
N/A
yes
FFF6h-FFF7h
3
ei1
External interrupt port F2..0
yes
FFF4h-FFF5h
4
ei2
External interrupt port B3..0
yes
FFF2h-FFF3h
5
ei3
External interrupt port B7..4
yes
FFF0h-FFF1h
7
SPI
SPI peripheral interrupts
SPICSR
yes
FFECh-FFEDh
8
TIMER A
TIMER A peripheral interrupts
TASR
no
FFEAh-FFEBh
9
TIMER B
TIMER B peripheral interrupts
TBSR
no
FFE8h-FFE9h
10
SCI
SCI Peripheral interrupts
SCISR
Lower
Priority
no
FFE6h-FFE7h
11
AVD
Auxiliary Voltage detector interrupt
SICSR
no
FFE4h-FFE5h
ST72F324, ST72324B
37/164
Figure 22. External Interrupt Control bits
IS10
IS11
EICR
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PBOR.3
PBDDR.3
IPB BIT
PB3
ei2 INTERRUPT SOURCE
PORT B [3:0] INTERRUPTS
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
IS10
IS11
EICR
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PBOR.7
PBDDR.7
PB7
ei3 INTERRUPT SOURCE
PORT B [7:4] INTERRUPTS
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
IS20
IS21
EICR
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PAOR.3
PADDR.3
IPA BIT
PA3
ei0 INTERRUPT SOURCE
PORT A3 INTERRUPT
IS20
IS21
EICR
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PFOR.2
PFDDR.2
PF2
ei1 INTERRUPT SOURCE
PORT F [2:0] INTERRUPTS
PF2
PF1
PF0
ST72F324, ST72324B
38/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
7.7 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7:6 = IS1[1:0] ei2 and ei3 sensitivity
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS1[1:0]
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:
- ei2 (port B3..0)
- ei3 (port B4)
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of
the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
Bit 5 = IPB Interrupt polarity for port B
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port B
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared
by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register
are both set to 1 (level 3).
0: No sensitivity inversion
1: Sensitivity inversion
Bit 4:3 = IS2[1:0] ei0 and ei1 sensitivity
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS2[1:0]
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:
- ei0 (port A3..0)
- ei1 (port F2..0)
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of
the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
Bit 2 = IPA Interrupt polarity for port A
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port A
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared
by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register
are both set to 1 (level 3).
0: No sensitivity inversion
1: Sensitivity inversion
Bits 1:0 = Reserved, must always be kept cleared.
7
0
IS11
IS10
IPB
IS21
IS20
IPA
0
0
IS11 IS10
External Interrupt Sensitivity
IPB bit =0
IPB bit =1
0
0
Falling edge &
low level
Rising edge
& high level
0
1
Rising edge only
Falling edge only
1
0
Falling edge only
Rising edge only
1
1
Rising and falling edge
IS11 IS10
External Interrupt Sensitivity
0
0
Falling edge & low level
0
1
Rising edge only
1
0
Falling edge only
1
1
Rising and falling edge
IS21 IS20
External Interrupt Sensitivity
IPA bit =0
IPA bit =1
0
0
Falling edge &
low level
Rising edge
& high level
0
1
Rising edge only
Falling edge only
1
0
Falling edge only
Rising edge only
1
1
Rising and falling edge
IS21 IS20
External Interrupt Sensitivity
0
0
Falling edge & low level
0
1
Rising edge only
1
0
Falling edge only
1
1
Rising and falling edge
ST72F324, ST72324B
39/164
INTERRUPTS (Cont'd)
Table 9. Nested Interrupts Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0024h
ISPR0
Reset Value
ei1
ei0
MCC + SI
I1_3
1
I0_3
1
I1_2
1
I0_2
1
I1_1
1
I0_1
1
1
1
0025h
ISPR1
Reset Value
SPI
ei3
ei2
I1_7
1
I0_7
1
I1_6
1
I0_6
1
I1_5
1
I0_5
1
I1_4
1
I0_4
1
0026h
ISPR2
Reset Value
AVD
SCI
TIMER B
TIMER A
I1_11
1
I0_11
1
I1_10
1
I0_10
1
I1_9
1
I0_9
1
I1_8
1
I0_8
1
0027h
ISPR3
Reset Value
1
1
1
1
I1_13
1
I0_13
1
I1_12
1
I0_12
1
0028h
EICR
Reset Value
IS11
0
IS10
0
IPB
0
IS21
0
IS20
0
IPA
0
0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
40/164
8 POWER SAVING MODES
8.1 INTRODUCTION
To give a large measure of flexibility to the applica-
tion in terms of power consumption, four main
power saving modes are implemented in the ST7
(see
Figure 23
): SLOW, WAIT (SLOW WAIT), AC-
TIVE HALT and HALT.
After a RESET the normal operating mode is se-
lected by default (RUN mode). This mode drives
the device (CPU and embedded peripherals) by
means of a master clock which is based on the
main oscillator frequency divided or multiplied by 2
(f
OSC2
).
From RUN mode, the different power saving
modes may be selected by setting the relevant
register bits or by calling the specific ST7 software
instruction whose action depends on the oscillator
status.
Figure 23. Power Saving Mode Transitions
8.2 SLOW MODE
This mode has two targets:
To reduce power consumption by decreasing the
internal clock in the device,
To adapt the internal clock frequency (f
CPU
) to
the available supply voltage.
SLOW mode is controlled by three bits in the
MCCSR register: the SMS bit which enables or
disables Slow mode and two CPx bits which select
the internal slow frequency (f
CPU
).
In this mode, the master clock frequency (f
OSC2
)
can be divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16. The CPU and pe-
ripherals are clocked at this lower frequency
(f
CPU
).
Note: SLOW-WAIT mode is activated when enter-
ing the WAIT mode while the device is already in
SLOW mode.
Figure 24. SLOW Mode Clock Transitions
POWER CONSUMPTION
WAIT
SLOW
RUN
ACTIVE HALT
High
Low
SLOW WAIT
HALT
00
01
SMS
CP1:0
f
CPU
NEW SLOW
NORMAL RUN MODE
MC
CSR
FREQUENCY
REQUEST
REQUEST
f
OSC2
f
OSC2
/2
f
OSC2
/4
f
OSC2
ST72F324, ST72324B
41/164
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont'd)
8.3 WAIT MODE
WAIT mode places the MCU in a low power con-
sumption mode by stopping the CPU.
This power saving mode is selected by calling the
`WFI' instruction.
All peripherals remain active. During WAIT mode,
the I[1:0] bits of the CC register are forced to `10',
to enable all interrupts. All other registers and
memory remain unchanged. The MCU remains in
WAIT mode until an interrupt or RESET occurs,
whereupon the Program Counter branches to the
starting address of the interrupt or Reset service
routine.
The MCU will remain in WAIT mode until a Reset
or an Interrupt occurs, causing it to wake up.
Refer to
Figure 25
.
Figure 25. WAIT Mode Flow-chart
Note:
1. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-
ister are set to the current software priority level of
the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC
register is popped.
WFI INSTRUCTION
RESET
INTERRUPT
Y
N
N
Y
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
10
OFF
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
10
ON
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
XX
1)
ON
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
CYCLE DELAY
ST72F324, ST72324B
42/164
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont'd)
8.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES
ACTIVE-HALT and HALT modes are the two low-
est power consumption modes of the MCU. They
are both entered by executing the `HALT' instruc-
tion. The decision to enter either in ACTIVE-HALT
or HALT mode is given by the MCC/RTC interrupt
enable flag (OIE bit in MCCSR register).
8.4.1 ACTIVE-HALT MODE
ACTIVE-HALT mode is the lowest power con-
sumption mode of the MCU with a real time clock
available. It is entered by executing the `HALT' in-
struction when the OIE bit of the Main Clock Con-
troller Status register (MCCSR) is set (see
Section
10.2 on page 56
for more details on the MCCSR
register).
The MCU can exit ACTIVE-HALT mode on recep-
tion of either an MCC/RTC interrupt, a specific in-
terrupt (see
Table 8, "Interrupt Mapping," on
page 36
) or a RESET. When exiting ACTIVE-
HALT mode by means of an interrupt, no 256 or
4096 CPU cycle delay occurs. The CPU resumes
operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching
the reset vector which woke it up (see
Figure 27
).
When entering ACTIVE-HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits
in the CC register are forced to `10b' to enable in-
terrupts. Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the
MCU wakes up immediately.
In ACTIVE-HALT mode, only the main oscillator
and its associated counter (MCC/RTC) are run-
ning to keep a wake-up time base. All other periph-
erals are not clocked except those which get their
clock supply from another clock generator (such
as external or auxiliary oscillator).
The safeguard against staying locked in ACTIVE-
HALT mode is provided by the oscillator interrupt.
Note: As soon as the interrupt capability of one of
the oscillators is selected (MCCSR.OIE bit set),
entering ACTIVE-HALT mode while the Watchdog
is active does not generate a RESET.
This means that the device cannot spend more
than a defined delay in this power saving mode.
CAUTION: When exiting ACTIVE-HALT mode fol-
lowing an interrupt, OIE bit of MCCSR register
must not be cleared before t
DELAY
after the inter-
rupt occurs (t
DELAY
= 256 or 4096 t
CPU
delay de-
pending on option byte). Otherwise, the ST7 en-
ters HALT mode for the remaining t
DELAY
period.
Figure 26. ACTIVE-HALT Timing Overview
Figure 27. ACTIVE-HALT Mode Flow-chart
Notes:
1. This delay occurs only if the MCU exits ACTIVE-
HALT mode by means of a RESET.
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source
can still be active.
3. Only the MCC/RTC interrupt and some specific
interrupts can exit the MCU from ACTIVE-HALT
mode (such as external interrupt). Refer to
Table 8, "Interrupt Mapping," on page 36
for more
details.
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-
ister are set to the current software priority level of
the interrupt routine and restored when the CC
register is popped.
MCCSR
OIE bit
Power Saving Mode entered when HALT
instruction is executed
0
HALT mode
1
ACTIVE-HALT mode
HALT
RUN
RUN
256 OR 4096 CPU
CYCLE DELAY
1)
RESET
OR
INTERRUPT
HALT
INSTRUCTION
FETCH
VECTOR
ACTIVE
[MCCSR.OIE=1]
HALT INSTRUCTION
RESET
INTERRUPT
3)
Y
N
N
Y
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
2)
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
10
OFF
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
XX
4)
ON
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
XX
4)
ON
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
CYCLE DELAY
(MCCSR.OIE=1)
ST72F324, ST72324B
43/164
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont'd)
8.4.2 HALT MODE
The HALT mode is the lowest power consumption
mode of the MCU. It is entered by executing the
`HALT' instruction when the OIE bit of the Main
Clock Controller Status register (MCCSR) is
cleared (see
Section 10.2 on page 56
for more de-
tails on the MCCSR register).
The MCU can exit HALT mode on reception of ei-
ther a specific interrupt (see
Table 8, "Interrupt
Mapping," on page 36
) or a RESET. When exiting
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt,
the oscillator is immediately turned on and the 256
or 4096 CPU cycle delay is used to stabilize the
oscillator. After the start up delay, the CPU
resumes operation by servicing the interrupt or by
fetching the reset vector which woke it up (see
Fig-
ure 29
).
When entering HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits in the
CC register are forced to `10b'to enable interrupts.
Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the MCU
wakes up immediately.
In HALT mode, the main oscillator is turned off
causing all internal processing to be stopped, in-
cluding the operation of the on-chip peripherals.
All peripherals are not clocked except the ones
which get their clock supply from another clock
generator (such as an external or auxiliary oscilla-
tor).
The compatibility of Watchdog operation with
HALT mode is configured by the "WDGHALT" op-
tion bit of the option byte. The HALT instruction
when executed while the Watchdog system is en-
abled, can generate a Watchdog RESET (see
Section 14.1 on page 151
) for more details.
Figure 28. HALT Timing Overview
Figure 29. HALT Mode Flow-chart
Notes:
1. WDGHALT is an option bit. See option byte sec-
tion for more details.
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source
can still be active.
3. Only some specific interrupts can exit the MCU
from HALT mode (such as external interrupt). Re-
fer to
Table 8, "Interrupt Mapping," on page 36
for
more details.
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-
ister are set to the current software priority level of
the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC
register is popped.
HALT
RUN
RUN
256 OR 4096 CPU
CYCLE DELAY
RESET
OR
INTERRUPT
HALT
INSTRUCTION
FETCH
VECTOR
[MCCSR.OIE=0]
HALT INSTRUCTION
RESET
INTERRUPT
3)
Y
N
N
Y
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
2)
I[1:0] BITS
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
XX
4)
ON
CPU
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
XX
4)
ON
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
DELAY
WATCHDOG
ENABLE
DISABLE
WDGHALT
1)
0
WATCHDOG
RESET
1
(MCCSR.OIE=0)
CYCLE
ST72F324, ST72324B
44/164
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont'd)
8.4.2.1 Halt Mode Recommendations
Make sure that an external event is available to
wake up the microcontroller from Halt mode.
When using an external interrupt to wake up the
microcontroller, reinitialize the corresponding I/O
as "Input Pull-up with Interrupt" before executing
the HALT instruction. The main reason for this is
that the I/O may be wrongly configured due to ex-
ternal interference or by an unforeseen logical
condition.
For the same reason, reinitialize the level sensi-
tiveness of each external interrupt as a precau-
tionary measure.
The opcode for the HALT instruction is 0x8E. To
avoid an unexpected HALT instruction due to a
program counter failure, it is advised to clear all
occurrences of the data value 0x8E from memo-
ry. For example, avoid defining a constant in
ROM with the value 0x8E.
As the HALT instruction clears the interrupt mask
in the CC register to allow interrupts, the user
may choose to clear all pending interrupt bits be-
fore executing the HALT instruction. This avoids
entering other peripheral interrupt routines after
executing the external interrupt routine corre-
sponding to the wake-up event (reset or external
interrupt).
ST72F324, ST72324B
45/164
9 I/O PORTS
9.1 INTRODUCTION
The I/O ports offer different functional modes:
transfer of data through digital inputs and outputs
and for specific pins:
external interrupt generation
alternate signal input/output for the on-chip pe-
ripherals.
An I/O port contains up to 8 pins. Each pin can be
programmed independently as digital input (with or
without interrupt generation) or digital output.
9.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Each port has 2 main registers:
Data Register (DR)
Data Direction Register (DDR)
and one optional register:
Option Register (OR)
Each I/O pin may be programmed using the corre-
sponding register bits in the DDR and OR regis-
ters: bit X corresponding to pin X of the port. The
same correspondence is used for the DR register.
The following description takes into account the
OR register, (for specific ports which do not pro-
vide this register refer to the I/O Port Implementa-
tion section). The generic I/O block diagram is
shown in
Figure 30
9.2.1 Input Modes
The input configuration is selected by clearing the
corresponding DDR register bit.
In this case, reading the DR register returns the
digital value applied to the external I/O pin.
Different input modes can be selected by software
through the OR register.
Notes:
1. Writing the DR register modifies the latch value
but does not affect the pin status.
2. When switching from input to output mode, the
DR register has to be written first to drive the cor-
rect level on the pin as soon as the port is config-
ured as an output.
3. Do not use read/modify/write instructions (BSET
or BRES) to modify the DR register
External interrupt function
When an I/O is configured as Input with Interrupt,
an event on this I/O can generate an external inter-
rupt request to the CPU.
Each pin can independently generate an interrupt
request. The interrupt sensitivity is independently
programmable using the sensitivity bits in the
EICR register.
Each external interrupt vector is linked to a dedi-
cated group of I/O port pins (see pinout description
and interrupt section). If several input pins are se-
lected simultaneously as interrupt sources, these
are first detected according to the sensitivity bits in
the EICR register and then logically ORed.
The external interrupts are hardware interrupts,
which means that the request latch (not accessible
directly by the application) is automatically cleared
when the corresponding interrupt vector is
fetched. To clear an unwanted pending interrupt
by software, the sensitivity bits in the EICR register
must be modified.
9.2.2 Output Modes
The output configuration is selected by setting the
corresponding DDR register bit. In this case, writ-
ing the DR register applies this digital value to the
I/O pin through the latch. Then reading the DR reg-
ister returns the previously stored value.
Two different output modes can be selected by
software through the OR register: Output push-pull
and open-drain.
DR register value and output pin status:
9.2.3 Alternate Functions
When an on-chip peripheral is configured to use a
pin, the alternate function is automatically select-
ed. This alternate function takes priority over the
standard I/O programming.
When the signal is coming from an on-chip periph-
eral, the I/O pin is automatically configured in out-
put mode (push-pull or open drain according to the
peripheral).
When the signal is going to an on-chip peripheral,
the I/O pin must be configured in input mode. In
this case, the pin state is also digitally readable by
addressing the DR register.
Note: Input pull-up configuration can cause unex-
pected value at the input of the alternate peripheral
input. When an on-chip peripheral use a pin as in-
put and output, this pin has to be configured in in-
put floating mode.
DR
Push-pull
Open-drain
0
V
SS
Vss
1
V
DD
Floating
ST72F324, ST72324B
46/164
I/O PORTS (Cont'd)
Figure 30. I/O Port General Block Diagram
Table 10. I/O Port Mode Options
Legend: NI - not implemented
Off - implemented not activated
On - implemented and activated
Note: The diode to V
DD
is not implemented in the
true open drain pads. A local protection between
the pad and V
SS
is implemented to protect the de-
vice against positive stress.
Configuration Mode
Pull-Up
P-Buffer
Diodes
to V
DD
to V
SS
Input
Floating with/without Interrupt
Off
Off
On
On
Pull-up with/without Interrupt
On
Output
Push-pull
Off
On
Open Drain (logic level)
Off
True Open Drain
NI
NI
NI (see note)
DR
DDR
OR
DA
T
A
B
U
S
PAD
V
DD
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
1
0
OR SEL
DDR SEL
DR SEL
PULL-UP
CONDITION
P-BUFFER
(see table below)
N-BUFFER
PULL-UP
(see table below)
1
0
ANALOG
INPUT
If implemented
ALTERNATE
INPUT
V
DD
DIODES
(see table below)
EXTERNAL
SOURCE (ei
x
)
INTERRUPT
CMOS
SCHMITT
TRIGGER
REGISTER
ACCESS
ST72F324, ST72324B
47/164
I/O PORTS (Cont'd)
Table 11. I/O Port Configurations
Notes:
1. When the I/O port is in input configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an output,
reading the DR register will read the alternate function output status.
2. When the I/O port is in output configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an input,
the alternate function reads the pin status given by the DR register content.
Hardware Configuration
INP
U
T
1)
OPE
N
-DR
A
IN
O
U
TP
UT
2)
P
U
SH
-PULL
O
UT
PUT
2)
CONDITION
PAD
V
DD
R
PU
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
DATA BUS
PULL-UP
INTERRUPT
DR REGISTER ACCESS
W
R
SOURCE (ei
x
)
DR
REGISTER
CONDITION
ALTERNATE INPUT
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
ANALOG INPUT
PAD
R
PU
DATA BUS
DR
DR REGISTER ACCESS
R/W
V
DD
ALTERNATE
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
OUTPUT
REGISTER
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
PAD
R
PU
DATA BUS
DR
DR REGISTER ACCESS
R/W
V
DD
ALTERNATE
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
OUTPUT
REGISTER
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
ST72F324, ST72324B
48/164
I/O PORTS (Cont'd)
CAUTION: The alternate function must not be ac-
tivated as long as the pin is configured as input
with interrupt, in order to avoid generating spurious
interrupts.
Analog alternate function
When the pin is used as an ADC input, the I/O
must be configured as floating input. The analog
multiplexer (controlled by the ADC registers)
switches the analog voltage present on the select-
ed pin to the common analog rail which is connect-
ed to the ADC input.
It is recommended not to change the voltage level
or loading on any port pin while conversion is in
progress. Furthermore it is recommended not to
have clocking pins located close to a selected an-
alog pin.
WARNING: The analog input voltage level must
be within the limits stated in the absolute maxi-
mum ratings.
9.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION
The hardware implementation on each I/O port de-
pends on the settings in the DDR and OR registers
and specific feature of the I/O port such as ADC In-
put or true open drain.
Switching these I/O ports from one state to anoth-
er should be done in a sequence that prevents un-
wanted side effects. Recommended safe transi-
tions are illustrated in
Figure 31
Other transitions
are potentially risky and should be avoided, since
they are likely to present unwanted side-effects
such as spurious interrupt generation.
Figure 31. Interrupt I/O Port State Transitions
9.4 LOW POWER MODES
9.5 INTERRUPTS
The external interrupt event generates an interrupt
if the corresponding configuration is selected with
DDR and OR registers and the interrupt mask in
the CC register is not active (RIM instruction).
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts
cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
HALT
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts
cause the device to exit from HALT mode.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
External interrupt on
selected external
event
-
DDRx
ORx
Yes
Yes
01
floating/pull-up
interrupt
INPUT
00
floating
(reset state)
INPUT
10
open-drain
OUTPUT
11
push-pull
OUTPUT
XX
= DDR, OR
ST72F324, ST72324B
49/164
I/O PORTS (Cont'd)
9.5.1 I/O Port Implementation
The I/O port register configurations are summa-
rised as follows.
Standard Ports
PA5:4, PC7:0, PD5:0,
PE1:0, PF7:6, 4
Interrupt Ports
PB4, PB2:0, PF1:0 (with pull-up)
PA3, PB3, PF2 (without pull-up)
True Open Drain Ports
PA7:6
Table 12. Port Configuration
MODE
DDR
OR
floating input
0
0
pull-up input
0
1
open drain output
1
0
push-pull output
1
1
MODE
DDR
OR
floating input
0
0
pull-up interrupt input
0
1
open drain output
1
0
push-pull output
1
1
MODE
DDR
OR
floating input
0
0
floating interrupt input
0
1
open drain output
1
0
push-pull output
1
1
MODE
DDR
floating input
0
open drain (high sink ports)
1
Port
Pin name
Input
Output
OR = 0
OR = 1
OR = 0
OR = 1
Port A
PA7:6
floating
true open-drain
PA5:4
floating
pull-up
open drain
push-pull
PA3
floating
floating interrupt
open drain
push-pull
Port B
PB3
floating
floating interrupt
open drain
push-pull
PB4, PB2:0
floating
pull-up interrupt
open drain
push-pull
Port C
PC7:0
floating
pull-up
open drain
push-pull
Port D
PD5:0
floating
pull-up
open drain
push-pull
Port E
PE1:0
floating
pull-up
open drain
push-pull
Port F
PF7:6, 4
floating
pull-up
open drain
push-pull
PF2
floating
floating interrupt
open drain
push-pull
PF1:0
floating
pull-up interrupt
open drain
push-pull
ST72F324, ST72324B
50/164
I/O PORTS (Cont'd)
Table 13. I/O Port Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reset Value
of all I/O port registers
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000h
PADR
MSB
LSB
0001h
PADDR
0002h
PAOR
0003h
PBDR
MSB
LSB
0004h
PBDDR
0005h
PBOR
0006h
PCDR
MSB
LSB
0007h
PCDDR
0008h
PCOR
0009h
PDDR
MSB
LSB
000Ah
PDDDR
000Bh
PDOR
000Ch
PEDR
MSB
LSB
000Dh
PEDDR
000Eh
PEOR
000Fh
PFDR
MSB
LSB
0010h
PFDDR
0011h
PFOR
ST72F324, ST72324B
51/164
10 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS
10.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG)
10.1.1 Introduction
The Watchdog timer is used to detect the occur-
rence of a software fault, usually generated by ex-
ternal interference or by unforeseen logical condi-
tions, which causes the application program to
abandon its normal sequence. The Watchdog cir-
cuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a pro-
grammed time period, unless the program refresh-
es the counter's contents before the T6 bit be-
comes cleared.
10.1.2 Main Features
s
Programmable free-running downcounter
s
Programmable reset
s
Reset (if watchdog activated) when the T6 bit
reaches zero
s
Optional reset on HALT instruction
(configurable by option byte)
s
Hardware Watchdog selectable by option byte
10.1.3 Functional Description
The counter value stored in the Watchdog Control
register (WDGCR bits T[6:0]), is decremented
every 16384 f
OSC2
cycles (approx.), and the
length of the timeout period can be programmed
by the user in 64 increments.
If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set)
and when the 7-bit timer (bits T[6:0]) rolls over
from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates
a reset cycle pulling low the reset pin for typically
500ns.
The application program must write in the
WDGCR register at regular intervals during normal
operation to prevent an MCU reset. This down-
counter is free-running: it counts down even if the
watchdog is disabled. The value to be stored in the
WDGCR register must be between FFh and C0h:
The WDGA bit is set (watchdog enabled)
The T6 bit is set to prevent generating an imme-
diate reset
The T[5:0] bits contain the number of increments
which represents the time delay before the
watchdog produces a reset (see
Figure 33. Ap-
proximate Timeout Duration
). The timing varies
between a minimum and a maximum value due
to the unknown status of the prescaler when writ-
ing to the WDGCR register (see
Figure 34
).
Following a reset, the watchdog is disabled. Once
activated it cannot be disabled, except by a reset.
The T6 bit can be used to generate a software re-
set (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).
If the watchdog is activated, the HALT instruction
will generate a Reset.
Figure 32. Watchdog Block Diagram
RESET
WDGA
6-BIT DOWNCOUNTER (CNT)
f
OSC2
T6
T0
WDG PRESCALER
WATCHDOG CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)
DIV 4
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
12-BIT MCC
RTC COUNTER
MSB
LSB
DIV 64
0
5
6
11
MCC/RTC
TB[1:0] bits
(MCCSR
Register)
ST72F324, ST72324B
52/164
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont'd)
10.1.4 How to Program the Watchdog Timeout
Figure 33
shows the linear relationship between
the 6-bit value to be loaded in the Watchdog Coun-
ter (CNT) and the resulting timeout duration in mil-
liseconds. This can be used for a quick calculation
without taking the timing variations into account. If
more precision is needed, use the formulae in
Fig-
ure 34
.
Caution: When writing to the WDGCR register, al-
ways write 1 in the T6 bit to avoid generating an
immediate reset.
Figure 33. Approximate Timeout Duration
CNT
V
a
l
u
e (
h
ex.
)
Watchdog timeout (ms) @ 8 MHz. f
OSC2
3F
00
38
128
1.5
65
30
28
20
18
10
08
50
34
18
82
98
114
ST72F324, ST72324B
53/164
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 34. Exact Timeout Duration (t
min
and t
max
)
WHERE:
t
min0
= (LSB + 128) x 64 x t
OSC2
t
max0
= 16384 x t
OSC2
t
OSC2
= 125ns if f
OSC2
=8 MHz
CNT = Value of T[5:0] bits in the WDGCR register (6 bits)
MSB and LSB are values from the table below depending on the timebase selected by the TB[1:0] bits
in the MCCSR register
To calculate the minimum Watchdog Timeout (t
min
):
IF
THEN
ELSE
To calculate the maximum Watchdog Timeout (t
max
):
IF
THEN
ELSE
Note: In the above formulae, division results must be rounded down to the next integer value.
Example:
With 2ms timeout selected in MCCSR register
TB1 Bit
(MCCSR Reg.)
TB0 Bit
(MCCSR Reg.)
Selected MCCSR
Timebase
MSB
LSB
0
0
2ms
4
59
0
1
4ms
8
53
1
0
10ms
20
35
1
1
25ms
49
54
Value of T[5:0] Bits in
WDGCR Register (Hex.)
Min. Watchdog
Timeout (ms)
t
min
Max. Watchdog
Timeout (ms)
t
max
00
1.496
2.048
3F
128
128.552
CNT
MSB
4
-------------
<
t
m in
t
min0
16384
CNT
t
osc2
+
=
t
min
t
min0
16384
CN T
4 CNT
MSB
-----------------
192
LS B
+
(
)
64
4CNT
MSB
-----------------
+
t
osc2
+
=
CNT
MSB
4
-------------
t
ma x
t
max0
16384
C NT
t
osc2
+
=
t
max
t
max0
16384
C NT
4CNT
MSB
-----------------
192
LSB
+
(
)
64
4CNT
MSB
-----------------
+
t
osc2
+
=
ST72F324, ST72324B
54/164
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont'd)
10.1.5 Low Power Modes
10.1.6 Hardware Watchdog Option
If Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte,
the watchdog is always active and the WDGA bit in
the WDGCR is not used. Refer to the Option Byte
description.
10.1.7 Using Halt Mode with the WDG
(WDGHALT option)
The following recommendation applies if Halt
mode is used when the watchdog is enabled.
Before executing the HALT instruction, refresh
the WDG counter, to avoid an unexpected WDG
reset immediately after waking up the microcon-
troller.
10.1.8 Interrupts
None.
10.1.9 Register Description
CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7F h)
Bit 7 = WDGA Activation bit.
This bit is set by software and only cleared by
hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the
watchdog can generate a reset.
0: Watchdog disabled
1: Watchdog enabled
Note: This bit is not used if the hardware watch-
dog option is enabled by option byte.
Bit 6:0 = T[6:0] 7-bit counter (MSB to LSB).
These bits contain the value of the watchdog
counter. It is decremented every 16384 f
OSC2
cy-
cles (approx.). A reset is produced when it rolls
over from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared).
Mode Description
SLOW
No effect on Watchdog.
WAIT
No effect on Watchdog.
HALT
OIE bit in
MCCSR
register
WDGHALT bit
in Option
Byte
0
0
No Watchdog reset is generated. The MCU enters Halt mode. The Watch-
dog counter is decremented once and then stops counting and is no longer
able to generate a watchdog reset until the MCU receives an external inter-
rupt or a reset.
If an external interrupt is received, the Watchdog restarts counting after 256
or 4096 CPU clocks. If a reset is generated, the Watchdog is disabled (reset
state) unless Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte. For applica-
tion recommendations see
Section 10.1.7
below.
0
1
A reset is generated.
1
x
No reset is generated. The MCU enters Active Halt mode. The Watchdog
counter is not decremented. It stop counting. When the MCU receives an
oscillator interrupt or external interrupt, the Watchdog restarts counting im-
mediately. When the MCU receives a reset the Watchdog restarts counting
after 256 or 4096 CPU clocks.
7
0
WDGA
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
T0
ST72F324, ST72324B
55/164
Table 14. Watchdog Timer Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
002Ah
WDGCR
Reset Value
WDGA
0
T6
1
T5
1
T4
1
T3
1
T2
1
T1
1
T0
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
56/164
10.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC)
The Main Clock Controller consists of three differ-
ent functions:
s
a programmable CPU clock prescaler
s
a clock-out signal to supply external devices
s
a real time clock timer with interrupt capability
Each function can be used independently and si-
multaneously.
10.2.1 Programmable CPU Clock Prescaler
The programmable CPU clock prescaler supplies
the clock for the ST7 CPU and its internal periph-
erals. It manages SLOW power saving mode (See
Section 8.2 SLOW MODE
for more details).
The prescaler selects the f
CPU
main clock frequen-
cy and is controlled by three bits in the MCCSR
register: CP[1:0] and SMS.
10.2.2 Clock-out Capability
The clock-out capability is an alternate function of
an I/O port pin that outputs a f
OSC2
clock to drive
external devices. It is controlled by the MCO bit in
the MCCSR register.
CAUTION: When selected, the clock out pin sus-
pends the clock during ACTIVE-HALT mode.
10.2.3 Real Time Clock Timer (RTC)
The counter of the real time clock timer allows an
interrupt to be generated based on an accurate
real time clock. Four different time bases depend-
ing directly on f
OSC2
are available. The whole
functionality is controlled by four bits of the MCC-
SR register: TB[1:0], OIE and OIF.
When the RTC interrupt is enabled (OIE bit set),
the ST7 enters ACTIVE-HALT mode when the
HALT instruction is executed. See
Section 8.4 AC-
TIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES
for more details.
10.2.4 Beeper
The beep function is controlled by the MCCBCR
register. It can output three selectable frequencies
on the BEEP pin (I/O port alternate function).
Figure 35. Main Clock Controller (MCC/RTC) Block Diagram
DIV 2, 4, 8, 16
MCC/RTC INTERRUPT
SMS
CP1 CP0
TB1
TB0
OIE
OIF
CPU CLOCK
MCCSR
12-BIT MCC RTC
COUNTER
TO CPU AND
PERIPHERALS
f
OSC2
f
CPU
MCO
MCO
BC1 BC0
MCCBCR
BEEP
SELECTION
BEEP SIGNAL
1
0
TO
WATCHDOG
TIMER
DIV 64
ST72F324, ST72324B
57/164
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont'd)
10.2.5 Low Power Modes
10.2.6 Interrupts
The MCC/RTC interrupt event generates an inter-
rupt if the OIE bit of the MCCSR register is set and
the interrupt mask in the CC register is not active
(RIM instruction).
Note:
The MCC/RTC interrupt wakes up the MCU from
ACTIVE-HALT mode, not from HALT mode.
10.2.7 Register Description
MCC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (MCCSR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h
)
Bit 7 = MCO Main clock out selection
This bit enables the MCO alternate function on the
PF0 I/O port. It is set and cleared by software.
0: MCO alternate function disabled (I/O pin free for
general-purpose I/O)
1: MCO alternate function enabled (f
CPU
on I/O
port)
Note: To reduce power consumption, the MCO
function is not active in ACTIVE-HALT mode.
Bit 6:5 = CP[1:0] CPU clock prescaler
These bits select the CPU clock prescaler which is
applied in the different slow modes. Their action is
conditioned by the setting of the SMS bit. These
two bits are set and cleared by software
Bit 4 = SMS Slow mode select
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Normal mode. f
CPU
=
f
OSC2
1: Slow mode. f
CPU
is given by CP1, CP0
See
Section 8.2 SLOW MODE
and
Section 10.2
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME
CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC)
for more de-
tails.
Bit 3:2 = TB[1:0] Time base control
These bits select the programmable divider time
base. They are set and cleared by software.
A modification of the time base is taken into ac-
count at the end of the current period (previously
set) to avoid an unwanted time shift. This allows to
use this time base as a real time clock.
Bit 1 = OIE Oscillator interrupt enable
This bit set and cleared by software.
0: Oscillator interrupt disabled
1: Oscillator interrupt enabled
This interrupt can be used to exit from ACTIVE-
HALT mode.
When this bit is set, calling the ST7 software HALT
instruction enters the ACTIVE-HALT power saving
mode
.
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on MCC/RTC peripheral.
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit
from WAIT mode.
ACTIVE-
HALT
No effect on MCC/RTC counter (OIE bit is
set), the registers are frozen.
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit
from ACTIVE-HALT mode.
HALT
MCC/RTC counter and registers are frozen.
MCC/RTC operation resumes when the
MCU is woken up by an interrupt with "exit
from HALT" capability.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
Time base overflow
event
OIF
OIE
Yes
No
1)
7
0
MCO
CP1
CP0
SMS
TB1
TB0
OIE
OIF
f
CPU
in SLOW mode
CP1
CP0
f
OSC2
/ 2
0
0
f
OSC2
/ 4
0
1
f
OSC2
/ 8
1
0
f
OSC2
/ 16
1
1
Counter
Prescaler
Time Base
TB1
TB0
f
OSC2
=4MHz f
OSC2
=8MHz
16000
4ms
2ms
0
0
32000
8ms
4ms
0
1
80000
20ms
10ms
1
0
200000
50ms
25ms
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
58/164
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont'd)
Bit 0 = OIF Oscillator interrupt flag
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software
reading the MCCSR register. It indicates when set
that the main oscillator has reached the selected
elapsed time (TB1:0).
0: Timeout not reached
1: Timeout reached
CAUTION: The BRES and BSET instructions
must not be used on the MCCSR register to avoid
unintentionally clearing the OIF bit.
MCC BEEP CONTROL REGISTER (MCCBCR)
Read /Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7:2 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 1:0 = BC[1:0] Beep control
These 2 bits select the PF1 pin beep capability.
The beep output signal is available in ACTIVE-
HALT mode but has to be disabled to reduce the
consumption.
Table 15. Main Clock Controller Register Map and Reset Values
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BC1
BC0
BC1
BC0
Beep mode with f
OSC2
=8MHz
0
0
Off
0
1
~2-KHz
Output
Beep signal
~50% duty cycle
1
0
~1-KHz
1
1
~500-Hz
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
002Bh
SICSR
Reset Value
0
AVDIE
0
AVDF
0
LVDRF
x
0
CSSIE
0
CSSD
0
WDGRF
x
002Ch
MCCSR
Reset Value
MCO
0
CP1
0
CP0
0
SMS
0
TB1
0
TB0
0
OIE
0
OIF
0
002Dh
MCCBCR
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
BC1
0
BC0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
59/164
10.3 16-BIT TIMER
10.3.1 Introduction
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter
driven by a programmable prescaler.
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including
pulse length measurement of up to two input sig-
nals (input capture) or generation of up to two out-
put waveforms (output compare and PWM).
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be mod-
ulated from a few microseconds to several milli-
seconds using the timer prescaler and the CPU
clock prescaler.
Some ST7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit timers.
They are completely independent, and do not
share any resources. They are synchronized after
a MCU reset as long as the timer clock frequen-
cies are not modified.
This description covers one or two 16-bit timers. In
ST7 devices with two timers, register names are
prefixed with TA (Timer A) or TB (Timer B).
10.3.2 Main Features
s
Programmable prescaler: f
CPU
divided by 2, 4 or 8.
s
Overflow status flag and maskable interrupt
s
External clock input (must be at least 4 times
slower than the CPU
clock speed) with the choice
of active edge
s
1 or 2 Output Compare functions each with:
2 dedicated 16-bit registers
2 dedicated programmable signals
2 dedicated status flags
1 dedicated maskable interrupt
s
1 or 2 Input Capture functions each with:
2 dedicated 16-bit registers
2 dedicated active edge selection signals
2 dedicated status flags
1 dedicated maskable interrupt
s
Pulse width modulation mode (PWM)
s
One pulse mode
s
Reduced Power Mode
s
5 alternate functions on I/O ports (ICAP1, ICAP2,
OCMP1, OCMP2, EXTCLK)*
The Block Diagram is shown in
Figure 36
.
*Note: Some timer pins may not be available (not
bonded) in some ST7 devices. Refer to the device
pin out description.
When reading an input signal on a non-bonded
pin, the value will always be `1'.
10.3.3 Functional Description
10.3.3.1 Counter
The main block of the Programmable Timer is a
16-bit free running upcounter and its associated
16-bit registers. The 16-bit registers are made up
of two 8-bit registers called high & low.
Counter Register (CR):
Counter High Register (CHR) is the most sig-
nificant byte (MS Byte).
Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least sig-
nificant byte (LS Byte).
Alternate Counter Register (ACR)
Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is
the most significant byte (MS Byte).
Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the
least significant byte (LS Byte).
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the
same value but with the difference that reading the
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (Timer
overflow flag), located in the Status register, (SR),
(see note at the end of paragraph titled 16-bit read
sequence).
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets
the free running counter to the FFFCh value.
Both counters have a reset value of FFFCh (this is
the only value which is reloaded in the 16-bit tim-
er). The reset value of both counters is also
FFFCh in One Pulse mode and PWM mode.
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in
Table 16 Clock
Control Bits
. The value in the counter register re-
peats every 131072, 262144 or 524288 CPU clock
cycles depending on the CC[1:0] bits.
The timer frequency can be f
CPU
/2, f
CPU
/4, f
CPU
/8
or an external frequency.
Caution: In Flash devices, Timer A functionality
has the following restrictions:
TAOC2HR and TAOC2LR registers are write
only
Input Capture 2 is not implemented
The corresponding interrupts cannot be used
(ICF2, OCF2 forced by hardware to zero)
ST72F324, ST72324B
60/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 36. Timer Block Diagram
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
COUNTER
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
OUTPUT COMPARE
EDGE DETECT
OVERFLOW
DETECT
CIRCUIT
1/2
1/4
1/8
8-bit
buffer
ST7 INTERNAL BUS
LATCH1
OCMP1
ICAP1
EXTCLK
f
CPU
TIMER INTERRUPT
ICF2
ICF1
TIMD
0
0
OCF2
OCF1 TOF
PWM
OC1E
EXEDG
IEDG2
CC0
CC1
OC2E OPM
FOLV2
ICIE
OLVL1
IEDG1
OLVL2
FOLV1
OCIE TOIE
ICAP2
LATCH2
OCMP2
8
8
8 low
16
8 high
16
16
16
16
(Control Register 1) CR1
(Control Register 2) CR2
(Control/Status Register)
6
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
high
lo
w
high
high
high
lo
w
lo
w
lo
w
EXEDG
TIMER INTERNAL BUS
CIRCUIT1
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
CIRCUIT
1
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
2
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
1
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
2
CC[1:0]
COUNTER
pin
pin
pin
pin
pin
REGISTER
REGISTER
Note: If IC, OC and TO interrupt requests have separate vectors
then the last OR is not present (See device Interrupt Vector Table)
(See note)
CSR
ST72F324, ST72324B
61/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
16-bit read sequence: (from either the Counter
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).
The user must read the MS Byte first, then the LS
Byte value is buffered automatically.
This buffered value remains unchanged until the
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the
user reads the MS Byte several times.
After a complete reading sequence, if only the
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they re-
turn the LS Byte of the count value at the time of
the read.
Whatever the timer mode used (input capture, out-
put compare, one pulse mode or PWM mode) an
overflow occurs when the counter rolls over from
FFFFh to 0000h then:
The TOF bit of the SR register is set.
A timer interrupt is generated if:
TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set and
I bit of the CC register is cleared.
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt re-
mains pending to be issued as soon as they are
both true.
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done in
two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.
Notes: The TOF bit is not cleared by accesses to
ACLR register. The advantage of accessing the
ACLR register rather than the CLR register is that
it allows simultaneous use of the overflow function
and reading the free running counter at random
times (for example, to measure elapsed time) with-
out the risk of clearing the TOF bit erroneously.
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the
mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the
previous count (MCU awakened by an interrupt) or
from the reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).
10.3.3.2 External Clock
The external clock (where available) is selected if
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in the CR2 register.
The status of the EXEDG bit in the CR2 register
determines the type of level transition on the exter-
nal clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free run-
ning counter.
The counter is synchronized with the falling edge
of the internal CPU clock.
A minimum of four falling edges of the CPU clock
must occur between two consecutive active edges
of the external clock; thus the external clock fre-
quency must be less than a quarter of the CPU
clock frequency.
is buffered
Read
At t0
Read
Returns the buffered
LS Byte value at t0
At t0 +
t
Other
instructions
Beginning of the sequence
Sequence completed
LS Byte
LS Byte
MS Byte
ST72F324, ST72324B
62/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 37. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 2
Figure 38. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 4
Figure 39. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 8
Note: The MCU is in reset state when the internal reset signal is high, when it is low the MCU is running.
CPU CLOCK
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000
0001
0002
0003
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
FFFC
FFFD
0000
0001
CPU CLOCK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
CPU CLOCK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
FFFC
FFFD
0000
ST72F324, ST72324B
63/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.3.3 Input Capture
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because
there are 2 input capture functions in the 16-bit
timer.
The two 16-bit input capture registers (IC1R and
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free run-
ning counter after a transition is detected on the
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).
ICiR register is a read-only register.
The active transition is software programmable
through the IEDGi bit of Control Registers (CRi).
Timing resolution is one count of the free running
counter: (
f
CPU
/
CC[1:0]).
Procedure:
To use the input capture function select the follow-
ing in the CR2 register:
Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
).
Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit (the ICAP2 pin
must be configured as floating input or input with
pull-up without interrupt if this configuration is
available).
And select the following in the CR1 register:
Set the ICIE bit to generate an interrupt after an
input capture coming from either the ICAP1 pin
or the ICAP2 pin
Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1pin must
be configured as floating input or input with pull-
up without interrupt if this configuration is availa-
ble).
When an input capture occurs:
ICFi bit is set.
The ICiR register contains the value of the free
running counter on the active transition on the
ICAPi pin (see
Figure 41
).
A timer interrupt is generated if the ICIE bit is set
and the I bit is cleared in the CC register. Other-
wise, the interrupt remains pending until both
conditions become true.
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.
Notes:
1. After reading the ICiHR register, transfer of
input capture data is inhibited and ICFi will
never be set until the ICiLR register is also
read.
2. The ICiR register contains the free running
counter value which corresponds to the most
recent input capture.
3. The 2 input capture functions can be used
together even if the timer also uses the 2 output
compare functions.
4. In One pulse Mode and PWM mode only Input
Capture 2 can be used.
5. The alternate inputs (ICAP1 & ICAP2) are
always directly connected to the timer. So any
transitions on these pins activates the input
capture function.
Moreover if one of the ICAPi pins is configured
as an input and the second one as an output,
an interrupt can be generated if the user tog-
gles the output pin and if the ICIE bit is set.
This can be avoided if the input capture func-
tion i is disabled by reading the ICiHR (see note
1).
6. The TOF bit can be used with interrupt genera-
tion in order to measure events that go beyond
the timer range (FFFFh).
7. In Flash devices, the ICAP2 registers
(TAIC2HR, TAIC2LR) are not available on
Timer A. The corresponding interrupts cannot
be used (ICF2 is forced by hardware to 0).
MS Byte
LS Byte
ICiR
ICiHR
ICiLR
ST72F324, ST72324B
64/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 40. Input Capture Block Diagram
Figure 41. Input Capture Timing Diagram
ICIE
CC0
CC1
16-BIT FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
IEDG1
(Control Register 1) CR1
(Control Register 2) CR2
ICF2
ICF1
0
0
0
(Status Register) SR
IEDG2
ICAP1
ICAP2
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
16-BIT
IC1R Register
IC2R Register
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT1
pin
pin
FF01
FF02
FF03
FF03
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
ICAPi PIN
ICAPi FLAG
ICAPi REGISTER
Note: The
rising edge is the
a
ctive edge.
ST72F324, ST72324B
65/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.3.4 Output Compare
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because
there are 2 output compare functions in the 16-bit
timer.
This function can be used to control an output
waveform or indicate when a period of time has
elapsed.
When a match is found between the Output Com-
pare register and the free running counter, the out-
put compare function:
Assigns pins with a programmable value if the
OCiE bit is set
Sets a flag in the status register
Generates an interrupt if enabled
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R)
contain the value to be compared to the counter
register each timer clock cycle.
These registers are readable and writable and are
not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event
changes the OC
i
R value to 8000h.
Timing resolution is one count of the free running
counter: (
f
CPU/
CC[1:0]
).
Procedure:
To use the output compare function, select the fol-
lowing in the CR2 register:
Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed then the
OCMPi pin is dedicated to the output compare i
signal.
Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
).
And select the following in the CR1 register:
Select the OLVLi bit to applied to the OCMPi pins
after the match occurs.
Set the OCIE bit to generate an interrupt if it is
needed.
When a match is found between OCRi register
and CR register:
OCFi bit is set.
The OCMPi pin takes OLVLi bit value (OCMPi
pin latch is forced low during reset).
A timer interrupt is generated if the OCIE bit is
set in the CR1 register and the I bit is cleared in
the CC register (CC).
The OC
i
R register value required for a specific tim-
ing application can be calculated using the follow-
ing formula:
Where:
t
= Output compare period (in seconds)
f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 de-
pending on CC[1:0] bits, see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
)
If the timer clock is an external clock, the formula
is:
Where:
t
= Output compare period (in seconds)
f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
Clearing the output compare interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the OCFi bit) is done by:
1. Reading the SR register while the OCFi bit is
set.
2. An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.
The following procedure is recommended to pre-
vent the OCFi bit from being set between the time
it is read and the write to the OC
i
R register:
Write to the OCiHR register (further compares
are inhibited).
Read the SR register (first step of the clearance
of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).
Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output
compare function and clears the OCFi bit).
MS Byte
LS Byte
OCiR
OCiHR
OCiLR
OCiR =
t
*
f
CPU
PRESC
OCiR =
t
*
f
EXT
ST72F324, ST72324B
66/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Notes:
1. After a processor write cycle to the OCiHR reg-
ister, the output compare function is inhibited
until the OCiLR register is also written.
2. If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a
general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not
appear when a match is found but an interrupt
could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.
3. When the timer clock is f
CPU
/2, OCFi and
OCMPi are set while the counter value equals
the OCiR register value (see
Figure 43 on page
67
). This behaviour is the same in OPM or
PWM mode.
When the timer clock is f
CPU
/4, f
CPU
/8 or in
external clock mode, OCFi and OCMPi are set
while the counter value equals the OCiR regis-
ter value plus 1 (see
Figure 44 on page 67
).
4. The output compare functions can be used both
for generating external events on the OCMPi
pins even if the input capture mode is also
used.
5. The value in the 16-bit OC
i
R register and the
OLVi bit should be changed after each suc-
cessful comparison in order to control an output
waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.
6. In Flash devices, the TAOC2HR, TAOC2LR
registers are "write only" in Timer A. The corre-
sponding event cannot be generated (OCF2 is
forced by hardware to 0).
Forced Compare Output capability
When the FOLVi bit is set by software, the OLVLi
bit is copied to the OCMPi pin. The OLVi bit has to
be toggled in order to toggle the OCMPi pin when
it is enabled (OCiE bit=1). The OCFi bit is then not
set by hardware, and thus no interrupt request is
generated.
The FOLVLi bits have no effect in both one pulse
mode and PWM mode.
Figure 42. Output Compare Block Diagram
OUTPUT COMPARE
16-bit
CIRCUIT
OC1R Register
16 BIT
FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
OC1E
CC0
CC1
OC2E
OLVL1
OLVL2
OCIE
(Control Register 1) CR1
(Control Register 2) CR2
0
0
0
OCF2
OCF1
(Status Register) SR
16-bit
16-bit
OCMP1
OCMP2
Latch
1
Latch
2
OC2R Register
Pin
Pin
FOLV2 FOLV1
ST72F324, ST72324B
67/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 43. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f
TIMER
=f
CPU
/2
Figure 44. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f
TIMER
=f
CPU
/4
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)
2ED3
2ED0
2ED1 2ED2
2ED3 2ED4
2ECF
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)
COMPARE REGISTER i LATCH
2ED3
2ED0
2ED1 2ED2
2ED3 2ED4
2ECF
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)
ST72F324, ST72324B
68/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a
pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is
selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.
The one pulse mode uses the Input Capture1
function and the Output Compare1 function.
Procedure:
To use one pulse mode:
1. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-
sponding to the length of the pulse (see the for-
mula in the opposite column).
2. Select the following in the CR1 register:
Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-
plied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.
Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-
plied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.
Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin
must be configured as floating input).
3. Select the following in the CR2 register:
Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then ded-
icated to the Output Compare 1 function.
Set the OPM bit.
Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
).
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the coun-
ter is initialized to FFFCh and OLVL2 bit is loaded
on the OCMP1 pin, the ICF1 bit is set and the val-
ue FFFDh is loaded in the IC1R register.
Because the ICF1 bit is set when an active edge
occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the ICIE
bit is set.
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.
The OC1R register value required for a specific
timing application can be calculated using the fol-
lowing formula:
Where:
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)
f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-
ing on the CC[1:0] bits, see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
)
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:
Where:
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)
f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
When the value of the counter is equal to the value
of the contents of the OC1R register, the OLVL1
bit is output on the OCMP1 pin, (See
Figure 45
).
Notes:
1. The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in one
pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate an
Output Compare interrupt.
2. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active one.
3. If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be
seen on the OCMP1 pin.
4. The ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input
capture. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform
input capture (ICF2 can be set and IC2R can be
loaded) but the user must take care that the
counter is reset each time a valid edge occurs
on the ICAP1 pin and ICF1 can also generates
interrupt if ICIE is set.
5. When one pulse mode is used OC1R is dedi-
cated to this mode. Nevertheless OC2R and
OCF2 can be used to indicate a period of time
has been elapsed but cannot generate an out-
put waveform because the level OLVL2 is dedi-
cated to the one pulse mode.
6. In Flash devices, Timer A OCF2 bit is forced by
hardware to 0.
event occurs
Counter
= OC1R
OCMP1 = OLVL1
When
When
on ICAP1
One pulse mode cycle
OCMP1 = OLVL2
Counter is reset
to FFFCh
ICF1 bit is set
ICR1 = Counter
OCiR Value =
t
*
f
CPU
PRESC
- 5
OCiR =
t
*
f
EXT
-5
ST72F324, ST72324B
69/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Figure 45. One Pulse Mode Timing Example
Figure 46. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing Example with 2 Output Compare Functions
COUNTER
FFFC FFFD FFFE
2ED0
2ED1 2ED2
2ED3
FFFC FFFD
OLVL2
OLVL2
OLVL1
ICAP1
OCMP1
compare1
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1
01F8
01F8
2ED3
IC1R
COUNTER 34E2
34E2
FFFC
OLVL2
OLVL2
OLVL1
OCMP1
compare2
compare1
compare2
Note: OC1R=2ED0h, OC2R=34E2, OLVL1=0, OLVL2= 1
FFFC FFFD FFFE
2ED0
2ED1 2ED2
ST72F324, ST72324B
70/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode enables the
generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse
length determined by the value of the OC1R and
OC2R registers.
Pulse Width Modulation mode uses the complete
Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R regis-
ter, and so this functionality can not be used when
PWM mode is activated.
In PWM mode, double buffering is implemented on
the output compare registers. Any new values writ-
ten in the OC1R and OC2R registers are taken
into account only at the end of the PWM period
(OC2) to avoid spikes on the PWM output pin
(OCMP1).
Procedure
To use pulse width modulation mode:
1. Load the OC2R register with the value corre-
sponding to the period of the signal using the
formula in the opposite column.
2. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-
sponding to the period of the pulse if (OLVL1=0
and OLVL2=1) using the formula in the oppo-
site column.
3. Select the following in the CR1 register:
Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful
comparison with the OC1R register.
Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful
comparison with the OC2R register.
4. Select the following in the CR2 register:
Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicat-
ed to the output compare 1 function.
Set the PWM bit.
Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
Table 16
Clock Control Bits
).
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0 the length of the posi-
tive pulse is the difference between the OC2R and
OC1R registers.
If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen
on the OCMP1 pin.
The OC
i
R register value required for a specific tim-
ing application can be calculated using the follow-
ing formula:
Where:
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)
f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-
ing on CC[1:0] bits, see
Table 16
)
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:
Where:
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)
f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter
to be initialized to FFFCh (See
Figure 46
)
Notes:
1. After a write instruction to the OCiHR register,
the output compare function is inhibited until the
OCiLR register is also written.
2. The OCF1 and OCF2 bits cannot be set by
hardware in PWM mode therefore the Output
Compare interrupt is inhibited.
3. The ICF1 bit is set by hardware when the coun-
ter reaches the OC2R value and can produce a
timer interrupt if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is
cleared.
4. In PWM mode the ICAP1 pin can not be used
to perform input capture because it is discon-
nected to the timer. The ICAP2 pin can be used
to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set and
IC2R can be loaded) but the user must take
care that the counter is reset each period and
ICF1 can also generates interrupt if ICIE is set.
5. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active one.
6. In Flash devices, the TAOC2HR, TAOC2LR
registers in Timer A are "write only". A read
operation returns an undefined value.
7. In Flash devices, the ICAP2 registers
(TAIC2HR, TAIC2LR) are not available in Timer A.
The ICF2 bit is forced by hardware to 0.
Counter
OCMP1 = OLVL2
Counter
= OC2R
OCMP1 = OLVL1
When
When
= OC1R
Pulse Width Modulation cycle
Counter is reset
to FFFCh
ICF1 bit is set
OCiR Value =
t
*
f
CPU
PRESC
- 5
OCiR =
t
*
f
EXT
-5
ST72F324, ST72324B
71/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.4 Low Power Modes
10.3.5 Interrupts
Note: The 16-bit Timer interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chap-
ter). These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt
mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
* In Flash devices, the ICF2 and OCF2 bits are forced by hardware to 0 in Timer A, hence there is no in-
terrupt event for these flags.
10.3.6 Summary of Timer modes
1) See note 4 in
Section 10.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode
2) See note 5 and 6 in
Section 10.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode
3) See note 4 in
Section 10.3.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
4) In Flash devices, the TAOC2HR, TAOC2LR registers are write only in Timer A. Output Compare 2
event cannot be generated, OCF2 is forced by hardware to 0.
5) In Flash devices, Input Capture 2 is not implemented in Timer A. ICF2 bit is forced by hardware to 0.
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on 16-bit Timer.
Timer interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
HALT
16-bit Timer registers are frozen.
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until Halt mode is exited. Counting resumes from the previous
count when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with "exit from HALT mode" capability or from the counter
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a RESET.
If an input capture event occurs on the ICAPi pin, the input capture detection circuitry is armed. Consequent-
ly, when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with "exit from HALT mode" capability, the ICFi bit is set, and
the counter value present when exiting from HALT mode is captured into the ICiR register.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
Input Capture 1 event/Counter reset in PWM mode
ICF1
ICIE
Yes
No
Input Capture 2 event
ICF2
*
Yes
No
Output Compare 1 event (not available in PWM mode)
OCF1
OCIE
Yes
No
Output Compare 2 event (not available in PWM mode)
OCF2
*
Yes
No
Timer Overflow event
TOF
TOIE
Yes
No
MODES
TIMER RESOURCES
Input Capture 1
Input Capture 2
Output Compare 1 Output Compare 2
Input Capture (1 and/or 2)
Yes
Yes
2)5)
Yes
Yes
4)
Output Compare (1 and/or 2)
Yes
Yes
5)
Yes
Yes
4)
One Pulse Mode
No
Not
Recommended
1)5)
No
Partially
2)
PWM Mode
No
Not
Recommended
3)5)
No
No
ST72F324, ST72324B
72/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
10.3.7 Register Description
Each Timer is associated with three control and
status registers, and with six pairs of data registers
(16-bit values) relating to the two input captures,
the two output compares, the counter and the al-
ternate counter.
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the
ICF1 or ICF2 bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the
OCF1 or OCF2 bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF
bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No effect on the OCMP2 pin.
1: Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the
OCMP2 pin, if the OC2E bit is set and even if
there is no successful comparison.
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No effect on the OCMP1 pin.
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin, if
the OC1E bit is set and even if there is no suc-
cessful comparison.
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a
successful comparison occurs with the OC2R reg-
ister and OCxE is set in the CR2 register. This val-
ue is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse Mode
and Pulse Width Modulation mode.
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin when-
ever a successful comparison occurs with the
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2
register.
7
0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1
ST72F324, ST72324B
73/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Pin Enable.
This bit is used only to output the signal from the
timer on the OCMP1 pin (OLV1 in Output Com-
pare mode, both OLV1 and OLV2 in PWM and
one-pulse mode). Whatever the value of the OC1E
bit, the Output Compare 1 function of the timer re-
mains active.
0: OCMP1 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin
free for general-purpose I/O).
1: OCMP1 pin alternate function enabled.
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Pin Enable.
This bit is used only to output the signal from the
timer on the OCMP2 pin (OLV2 in Output Com-
pare mode). Whatever the value of the OC2E bit,
the Output Compare 2 function of the timer re-
mains active.
0: OCMP2 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin
free for general-purpose I/O).
1: OCMP2 pin alternate function enabled.
Note: In Flash devices, this bit is not available for
Timer A. It must be kept at its reset value.
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse Mode.
0: One Pulse Mode is not active.
1: One Pulse Mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be
used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the
active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The
length of the generated pulse depends on the
contents of the OC1R register.
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.
0: PWM mode is not active.
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a
programmable cyclic signal; the length of the
pulse depends on the value of OC1R register;
the period depends on the value of OC2R regis-
ter.
Bit 3, 2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.
The timer clock mode depends on these bits:
Table 16. Clock Control Bits
Note: If the external clock pin is not available, pro-
gramming the external clock configuration stops
the counter.
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the external clock pin EXTCLK will trigger the
counter register.
0: A falling edge triggers the counter register.
1: A rising edge triggers the counter register.
7
0
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG
Timer Clock
CC1
CC0
f
CPU
/ 4
0
0
f
CPU
/ 2
0
1
f
CPU
/ 8
1
0
External Clock (where
available)
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
74/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)
Read Only (except bit 2 R/W)
Reset Value: xxxx x0xx (xxh)
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP1 pin
or the counter has reached the OC2R value in
PWM mode. To clear this bit, first read the SR
register, then read or write the low byte of the
IC1R (IC1LR) register.
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has
matched the content of the OC1R register. To
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read
or write the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) reg-
ister.
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow Flag.
0: No timer overflow (reset value).
1: The free running counter rolled over from FFFFh
to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the SR reg-
ister, then read or write the low byte of the CR
(CLR) register.
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does
not clear TOF.
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP2
pin. To clear this bit, first read the SR register,
then read or write the low byte of the IC2R
(IC2LR) register.
Note: In Flash devices, this bit is not available for
Timer A and is forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has
matched the content of the OC2R register. To
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read
or write the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) reg-
ister.
Note: In Flash devices, this bit is not available for
Timer A and is forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 2 = TIMD Timer disable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it
freezes the timer prescaler and counter and disa-
bled the output functions (OCMP1 and OCMP2
pins) to reduce power consumption. Access to the
timer registers is still available, allowing the timer
configuration to be changed, or the counter reset,
while it is disabled.
0: Timer enabled
1: Timer prescaler, counter and outputs disabled
Bits 1:0 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
7
0
ICF1
OCF1
TOF
ICF2
OCF2 TIMD
0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
75/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
high part of the counter value (transferred by the
input capture 1 event).
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
low part of the counter value (transferred by the in-
put capture 1 event).
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 HIGH REGISTER
(OC1HR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 LOW REGISTER
(OC1LR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the value to be compared to the CLR register.
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
ST72F324, ST72324B
76/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 HIGH REGISTER
(OC2HR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
Note: In Flash devices, the Timer A OC2HR regis-
ter is write-only.
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 LOW REGISTER
(OC2LR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the value to be compared to the CLR register.
Note: In Flash devices, the Timer A OC2LR regis-
ter is write-only.
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the counter value.
COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the counter value. A write to this register resets the
counter. An access to this register after accessing
the CSR register clears the TOF bit.
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
ST72F324, ST72324B
77/164
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER
(ACHR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the counter value.
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER
(ACLR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the counter value. A write to this register resets the
counter. An access to this register after an access
to CSR register does not clear the TOF bit in the
CSR register.
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
high part of the counter value (transferred by the
Input Capture 2 event).
Note: In Flash devices, this register is not imple-
mented for Timer A.
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
low part of the counter value (transferred by the In-
put Capture 2 event).
Note: In Flash devices, this register is not imple-
mented for Timer A.
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
7
0
MSB
LSB
ST72F324, ST72324B
78/164
16-BIT TIMER (Cont'd)
Table 17. 16-Bit Timer Register Map and Reset Values
1
In Flash devices, these bits are not used in Timer A and must be kept cleared.
2
In Flash devices, these bits are forced by hardware to 0 in Timer A
3
In Flash devices, the TAOC2HR and TAOC2LR Registers are write only, reading them will return unde-
fined values
4
In Flash devices, the TAIC2HR and TAIC2LR registers are not present.
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Timer A: 32
Timer B: 42
CR1
Reset Value
ICIE
0
OCIE
0
TOIE
0
FOLV2
1
0
FOLV1
0
OLVL2
0
IEDG1
0
OLVL1
0
Timer A: 31
Timer B: 41
CR2
Reset Value
OC1E
0
OC2E
1
0
OPM
0
PWM
0
CC1
0
CC0
0
IEDG2
1
0
EXEDG
0
Timer A: 33
Timer B: 43
CSR
Reset Value
ICF1
x
OCF1
x
TOF
x
ICF2
2
x
OCF2
2
x
TIMD
0
-
x
-
x
Timer A: 34
Timer B: 44
IC1HR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
Timer A: 35
Timer B: 45
IC1LR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
Timer A: 36
Timer B: 46
OC1HR
Reset Value
MSB
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 37
Timer B: 47
OC1LR
Reset Value
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 3E
3
Timer B: 4E
OC2HR
Reset Value
MSB
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 3F
3
Timer B: 4F
OC2LR
Reset Value
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 38
Timer B: 48
CHR
Reset Value
MSB
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LSB
1
Timer A: 39
Timer B: 49
CLR
Reset Value
MSB
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 3A
Timer B: 4A
ACHR
Reset Value
MSB
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LSB
1
Timer A: 3B
Timer B: 4B
ACLR
Reset Value
MSB
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
LSB
0
Timer A: 3C
4
Timer B: 4C
IC2HR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
Timer A: 3D
4
Timer B: 4D
IC2LR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
ST72F324, ST72324B
79/164
10.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
10.4.1 Introduction
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows full-
duplex, synchronous, serial communication with
external devices. An SPI system may consist of a
master and one or more slaves however the SPI
interface can not be a master in a multi-master
system.
10.4.2 Main Features
s
Full duplex synchronous transfers (on 3 lines)
s
Simplex synchronous transfers (on 2 lines)
s
Master or slave operation
s
Six master mode frequencies (f
CPU
/4 max.)
s
f
CPU
/2 max. slave mode frequency (see note)
s
SS Management by software or hardware
s
Programmable clock polarity and phase
s
End of transfer interrupt flag
s
Write collision, Master Mode Fault and Overrun
flags
Note: In slave mode, continuous transmission is
not possible at maximum frequency due to the
software overhead for clearing status flags and to
initiate the next transmission sequence.
10.4.3 General Description
Figure 47
shows the serial peripheral interface
(SPI) block diagram. There are 3 registers:
SPI Control Register (SPICR)
SPI Control/Status Register (SPICSR)
SPI Data Register (SPIDR)
The SPI is connected to external devices through
4 pins:
MISO: Master In / Slave Out data
MOSI: Master Out / Slave In data
SCK: Serial Clock out by SPI masters and in-
put by SPI slaves
Figure 47. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram
SPIDR
Read Buffer
8-Bit Shift Register
Write
Read
Data/Address Bus
SPI
SPIE
SPE
MSTR
CPHA
SPR0
SPR1
CPOL
SERIAL CLOCK
GENERATOR
MOSI
MISO
SS
SCK
CONTROL
STATE
SPICR
SPICSR
Interrupt
request
MASTER
CONTROL
SPR2
0
7
0
7
SPIF WCOL
MODF
0
OVR
SSI
SSM
SOD
SOD
bit
SS
1
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
80/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
SS: Slave select:
This input signal acts as a `chip select' to let
the SPI master communicate with slaves indi-
vidually and to avoid contention on the data
lines. Slave SS inputs can be driven by stand-
ard I/O ports on the master MCU.
10.4.3.1 Functional Description
A basic example of interconnections between a
single master and a single slave is illustrated in
Figure 48
.
The MOSI pins are connected together and the
MISO pins are connected together. In this way
data is transferred serially between master and
slave (most significant bit first).
The communication is always initiated by the mas-
ter. When the master device transmits data to a
slave device via MOSI pin, the slave device re-
sponds by sending data to the master device via
the MISO pin. This implies full duplex communica-
tion with both data out and data in synchronized
with the same clock signal (which is provided by
the master device via the SCK pin).
To use a single data line, the MISO and MOSI pins
must be connected at each node ( in this case only
simplex communication is possible).
Four possible data/clock timing relationships may
be chosen (see
Figure 51
) but master and slave
must be programmed with the same timing mode.
Figure 48. Single Master/ Single Slave Application
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
SPI
CLOCK
GENERATOR
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
MISO
SCK
SCK
SLAVE
MASTER
SS
SS
+5V
MSBit
LSBit
MSBit
LSBit
Not used if SS is managed
by software
ST72F324, ST72324B
81/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.3.2 Slave Select Management
As an alternative to using the SS pin to control the
Slave Select signal, the application can choose to
manage the Slave Select signal by software. This
is configured by the SSM bit in the SPICSR regis-
ter (see
Figure 50
)
In software management, the external SS pin is
free for other application uses and the internal SS
signal level is driven by writing to the SSI bit in the
SPICSR register.
In Master mode:
SS internal must be held high continuously
In Slave Mode:
There are two cases depending on the data/clock
timing relationship (see
Figure 49
):
If CPHA=1 (data latched on 2nd clock edge):
SS internal must be held low during the entire
transmission. This implies that in single slave
applications the SS pin either can be tied to
V
SS
, or made free for standard I/O by manag-
ing the SS function by software (SSM= 1 and
SSI=0 in the in the SPICSR register)
If CPHA=0 (data latched on 1st clock edge):
SS internal must be held low during byte
transmission and pulled high between each
byte to allow the slave to write to the shift reg-
ister. If SS is not pulled high, a Write Collision
error will occur when the slave writes to the
shift register (see
Section 10.4.5.3
).
Figure 49. Generic SS Timing Diagram
Figure 50. Hardware/Software Slave Select Management
MOSI/MISO
Master SS
Slave SS
(if CPHA=0)
Slave SS
(if CPHA=1)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
1
0
SS internal
SSM bit
SSI bit
SS external pin
ST72F324, ST72324B
82/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.3.3 Master Mode Operation
In master mode, the serial clock is output on the
SCK pin. The clock frequency, polarity and phase
are configured by software (refer to the description
of the SPICSR register).
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to
the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by
pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if
CPOL=0).
To operate the SPI in master mode, perform the
following steps in order (if the SPICSR register is
not written first, the SPICR register setting (MSTR
bit) may be not taken into account):
1. Write to the SPICR register:
Select the clock frequency by configuring the
SPR[2:0]
bits.
Select the clock polarity and clock phase by
configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits.
Figure
51
shows the four possible configurations.
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL
and CPHA settings as the master.
2. Write to the SPICSR register:
Either set the SSM bit and set the SSI bit or
clear the SSM bit and tie the SS pin high for
the complete byte transmit sequence.
3. Write to the SPICR register:
Set the MSTR and SPE bits
Note: MSTR and SPE bits remain set only if
SS is high).
The transmit sequence begins when software
writes a byte in the SPIDR register.
10.4.3.4 Master Mode Transmit Sequence
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the
data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and
then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most sig-
nificant bit first.
When data transfer is complete:
The SPIF bit is set by hardware
An interrupt request is generated if the SPIE
bit is set and the interrupt mask in the CCR
register is cleared.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following
software sequence:
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the
SPIF bit is set
2. A read to the SPIDR register.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-
ister is read.
10.4.3.5 Slave Mode Operation
In slave mode, the serial clock is received on the
SCK pin from the master device.
To operate the SPI in slave mode:
1. Write to the SPICSR register to perform the fol-
lowing actions:
Select the clock polarity and clock phase by
configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits (see
Figure 51
).
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL
and CPHA settings as the master.
Manage the SS pin as described in
Section
10.4.3.2
and
Figure 49
. If CPHA=1 SS must
be held low continuously. If CPHA=0 SS must
be held low during byte transmission and
pulled up between each byte to let the slave
write in the shift register.
2. Write to the SPICR register to clear the MSTR
bit and set the SPE bit to enable the SPI I/O
functions.
10.4.3.6 Slave Mode Transmit Sequence
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the
data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and
then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most sig-
nificant bit first.
The transmit sequence begins when the slave de-
vice receives the clock signal and the most signifi-
cant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.
When data transfer is complete:
The SPIF bit is set by hardware
An interrupt request is generated if SPIE bit is
set and interrupt mask in the CCR register is
cleared.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following
software sequence:
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the
SPIF bit is set.
2. A write or a read to the SPIDR register.
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-
ister is read.
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second
transmission; however, it must be cleared before
the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an Overrun
condition (see
Section 10.4.5.2
).
ST72F324, ST72324B
83/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.4 Clock Phase and Clock Polarity
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen
by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits (See
Figure 51
).
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to
the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by
pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if
CPOL=0).
The combination of the CPOL clock polarity and
CPHA (clock phase) bits selects the data capture
clock edge
Figure 51
, shows an SPI transfer with the four
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The di-
agram may be interpreted as a master or slave
timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin,
the MOSI pin are directly connected between the
master and the slave device.
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication
byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by re-
setting the SPE bit.
Figure 51. Data Clock Timing Diagram
SCK
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
MISO
(from master)
MOSI
(from slave)
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
CPHA =1
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
MISO
(from master)
MOSI
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
CPHA =0
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics chapter.
(from slave)
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
ST72F324, ST72324B
84/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.5 Error Flags
10.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault (MODF)
Master mode fault occurs when the master device
has its SS pin pulled low.
When a Master mode fault occurs:
The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt re-
quest is generated if the SPIE bit is set.
The SPE bit is reset. This blocks all output
from the device and disables the SPI periph-
eral.
The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device
into slave mode.
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software
sequence:
1. A read access to the SPICSR register while the
MODF bit is set.
2. A write to the SPICR register.
Notes: To avoid any conflicts in an application
with multiple slaves, the SS pin must be pulled
high during the MODF bit clearing sequence. The
SPE and MSTR bits may be restored to their orig-
inal state during or after this clearing sequence.
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPE
and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in
the MODF bit clearing sequence.
10.4.5.2 Overrun Condition (OVR)
An overrun condition occurs, when the master de-
vice has sent a data byte and the slave device has
not cleared the SPIF bit issued from the previously
transmitted byte.
When an Overrun occurs:
The OVR bit is set and an interrupt request is
generated if the SPIE bit is set.
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte
sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to
the SPIDR register returns this byte. All other
bytes are lost.
The OVR bit is cleared by reading the SPICSR
register.
10.4.5.3 Write Collision Error (WCOL)
A write collision occurs when the software tries to
write to the SPIDR register while a data transfer is
taking place with an external device. When this
happens, the transfer continues uninterrupted;
and the software write will be unsuccessful.
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave
mode. See also
Section 10.4.3.2 Slave Select
Management
.
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the
received data byte is placed in a buffer in which
access is always synchronous with the MCU oper-
ation.
The WCOL bit in the SPICSR register is set if a
write collision occurs.
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit
is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software
sequence (see
Figure 52
).
Figure 52. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)
1st Step
Read SPICSR
Read SPIDR
2nd Step
SPIF =0
WCOL=0
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)
1st Step
2nd Step
WCOL=0
Read SPICSR
Read SPIDR
Note: Writing to the SPIDR regis-
ter instead of reading it does not
reset the WCOL bit
RESULT
RESULT
ST72F324, ST72324B
85/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.5.4 Single Master Systems
A typical single master system may be configured,
using an MCU as the master and four MCUs as
slaves (see
Figure 53
).
The master device selects the individual slave de-
vices by using four pins of a parallel port to control
the four SS pins of the slave devices.
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the
master device ports will be forced to be inputs at
that time, thus disabling the slave devices.
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line
the master allows only one active slave device
during a transmission.
For more security, the slave device may respond
to the master with the received data byte. Then the
master will receive the previous byte back from the
slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are con-
nected and the slave has not written to its SPIDR
register.
Other transmission security methods can use
ports for handshake lines or data bytes with com-
mand fields.
Figure 53. Single Master / Multiple Slave Configuration
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
MOSI
MOSI
MOSI
MISO
MISO
MISO
MISO
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SCK
SCK
SCK
SCK
SCK
5V
Po
r
t
s
Slave
MCU
Slave
MCU
Slave
MCU
Slave
MCU
Master
MCU
ST72F324, ST72324B
86/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.6 Low Power Modes
10.4.6.1 Using the SPI to wakeup the MCU from
Halt mode
In slave configuration, the SPI is able to wakeup
the ST7 device from HALT mode through a SPIF
interrupt. The data received is subsequently read
from the SPIDR register when the software is run-
ning (interrupt vector fetch). If multiple data trans-
fers have been performed before software clears
the SPIF bit, then the OVR bit is set by hardware.
Note: When waking up from Halt mode, if the SPI
remains in Slave mode, it is recommended to per-
form an extra communications cycle to bring the
SPI from Halt mode state to normal state. If the
SPI exits from Slave mode, it returns to normal
state immediately.
Caution: The SPI can wake up the ST7 from Halt
mode only if the Slave Select signal (external SS
pin or the SSI bit in the SPICSR register) is low
when the ST7 enters Halt mode. So if Slave selec-
tion is configured as external (see
Section
10.4.3.2
), make sure the master drives a low level
on the SS pin when the slave enters Halt mode.
10.4.7 Interrupts
Note: The SPI interrupt events are connected to
the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding
Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on SPI.
SPI interrupt events cause the device to exit
from WAIT mode.
HALT
SPI registers are frozen.
In HALT mode, the SPI is inactive. SPI oper-
ation resumes when the MCU is woken up by
an interrupt with "exit from HALT mode" ca-
pability. The data received is subsequently
read from the SPIDR register when the soft-
ware is running (interrupt vector fetching). If
several data are received before the wake-
up event, then an overrun error is generated.
This error can be detected after the fetch of
the interrupt routine that woke up the device.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
SPI End of Transfer
Event
SPIF
SPIE
Yes
Yes
Master Mode Fault
Event
MODF
Yes
No
Overrun Error
OVR
Yes
No
ST72F324, ST72324B
87/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.4.8 Register Description
CONTROL REGISTER (SPICR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 xxxx (0xh)
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial Peripheral Interrupt Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever
SPIF=1, MODF=1 or OVR=1 in the SPICSR
register
Bit 6 = SPE Serial Peripheral Output Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see
Section 10.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault
(MODF)
). The SPE bit is cleared by reset, so the
SPI peripheral is not initially connected to the ex-
ternal pins.
0: I/O pins free for general purpose I/O
1: SPI I/O pin alternate functions enabled
Bit 5 = SPR2 Divider Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software and is
cleared by reset. It is used with the SPR[1:0] bits to
set the baud rate. Refer to
Table 18 SPI Master
mode SCK Frequency
.
0: Divider by 2 enabled
1: Divider by 2 disabled
Note: This bit has no effect in slave mode.
Bit 4 = MSTR Master Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see
Section 10.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault
(MODF)
).
0: Slave mode
1: Master mode. The function of the SCK pin
changes from an input to an output and the func-
tions of the MISO and MOSI pins are reversed.
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock Polarity.
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit de-
termines the idle state of the serial Clock. The
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave
modes.
0: SCK pin has a low level idle state
1: SCK pin has a high level idle state
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication
byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by re-
setting the SPE bit.
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock Phase.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture
edge.
1: The second clock transition is the first capture
edge.
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL and
CPHA settings as the master.
Bits 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial Clock Frequency.
These bits are set and cleared by software. Used
with the SPR2 bit, they select the baud rate of the
SPI serial clock SCK output by the SPI in master
mode.
Note: These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.
Table 18. SPI Master mode SCK Frequency
7
0
SPIE
SPE
SPR2
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SPR1
SPR0
Serial Clock
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
f
CPU
/4
1
0
0
f
CPU
/8
0
0
0
f
CPU
/16
0
0
1
f
CPU
/32
1
1
0
f
CPU
/64
0
1
0
f
CPU
/128
0
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
88/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (SPICSR)
Read/Write (some bits Read Only)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral Data Transfer Flag
(Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has
been completed. An interrupt is generated if
SPIE=1 in the SPICR register. It is cleared by a
software sequence (an access to the SPICSR
register followed by a write or a read to the
SPIDR register).
0: Data transfer is in progress or the flag has been
cleared.
1: Data transfer between the device and an exter-
nal device has been completed.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-
ister is read.
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the
SPIDR register is done during a transmit se-
quence. It is cleared by a software sequence (see
Figure 52
).
0: No write collision occurred
1: A write collision has been detected
Bit 5 = OVR SPI Overrun error (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when the byte currently
being received in the shift register is ready to be
transferred into the SPIDR register while SPIF = 1
(See
Section 10.4.5.2
). An interrupt is generated if
SPIE = 1 in SPICR register. The OVR bit is cleared
by software reading the SPICSR register.
0: No overrun error
1: Overrun error detected
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is
pulled low in master mode (see
Section 10.4.5.1
Master Mode Fault (MODF)
). An SPI interrupt can
be generated if SPIE=1 in the SPICSR register.
This bit is cleared by a software sequence (An ac-
cess to the SPICR register while MODF=1 fol-
lowed by a write to the SPICR register).
0: No master mode fault detected
1: A fault in master mode has been detected
Bit 3 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 2 = SOD SPI Output Disable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it
disables the alternate function of the SPI output
(MOSI in master mode / MISO in slave mode)
0: SPI output enabled (if SPE=1)
1: SPI output disabled
Bit 1 = SSM SS Management.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it
disables the alternate function of the SPI SS pin
and uses the SSI bit value instead. See
Section
10.4.3.2 Slave Select Management
.
0: Hardware management (SS managed by exter-
nal pin)
1: Software management (internal SS signal con-
trolled by SSI bit. External SS pin free for gener-
al-purpose I/O)
Bit 0 = SSI SS Internal Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It acts as a
`chip select' by controlling the level of the SS slave
select signal when the SSM bit is set.
0 : Slave selected
1 : Slave deselected
DATA I/O REGISTER (SPIDR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
The SPIDR register is used to transmit and receive
data on the serial bus. In a master device, a write
to this register will initiate transmission/reception
of another byte.
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is
set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift
register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads
the serial peripheral data I/O register, the buffer is
actually being read.
While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the SPIDR
register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is
read.
Warning: A write to the SPIDR register places
data directly into the shift register for transmission.
A read to the SPIDR register returns the value lo-
cated in the buffer and not the content of the shift
register (see
Figure 47
).
7
0
SPIF
WCOL
OVR
MODF
-
SOD
SSM
SSI
7
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
ST72F324, ST72324B
89/164
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd)
Table 19. SPI Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0021h
SPIDR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
0022h
SPICR
Reset Value
SPIE
0
SPE
0
SPR2
0
MSTR
0
CPOL
x
CPHA
x
SPR1
x
SPR0
x
0023h
SPICSR
Reset Value
SPIF
0
WCOL
0
OR
0
MODF
0
0
SOD
0
SSM
0
SSI
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
90/164
10.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
10.5.1 Introduction
The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) offers
a flexible means of full-duplex data exchange with
external equipment requiring an industry standard
NRZ asynchronous serial data format. The SCI of-
fers a very wide range of baud rates using two
baud rate generator systems.
10.5.2 Main Features
s
Full duplex, asynchronous communications
s
NRZ standard format (Mark/Space)
s
Dual baud rate generator systems
s
Independently programmable transmit and
receive baud rates up to 500K baud.
s
Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits)
s
Receive buffer full, Transmit buffer empty and
End of Transmission flags
s
Two receiver wake-up modes:
Address bit (MSB)
Idle line
s
Muting function for multiprocessor configurations
s
Separate enable bits for Transmitter and
Receiver
s
Four error detection flags:
Overrun error
Noise error
Frame error
Parity error
s
Five interrupt sources with flags:
Transmit data register empty
Transmission complete
Receive data register full
Idle line received
Overrun error detected
s
Parity control:
Transmits parity bit
Checks parity of received data byte
s
Reduced power consumption mode
10.5.3 General Description
The interface is externally connected to another
device by two pins (see
Figure 55
):
TDO: Transmit Data Output. When the transmit-
ter and the receiver are disabled, the output pin
returns to its I/O port configuration. When the
transmitter and/or the receiver are enabled and
nothing is to be transmitted, the TDO pin is at
high level.
RDI: Receive Data Input is the serial data input.
Oversampling techniques are used for data re-
covery by discriminating between valid incoming
data and noise.
Through these pins, serial data is transmitted and
received as frames comprising:
An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception
A start bit
A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit first
A Stop bit indicating that the frame is complete.
This interface uses two types of baud rate generator:
A conventional type for commonly-used baud
rates,
An extended type with a prescaler offering a very
wide range of baud rates even with non-standard
oscillator frequencies.
ST72F324, ST72324B
91/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
Figure 54. SCI Block Diagram
WAKE
UP
UNIT
RECEIVER
CONTROL
SR
TRANSMIT
CONTROL
TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR
NF
FE
PE
SCI
CONTROL
INTERRUPT
CR1
R8
T8
SCID
M
WAKE
PCE
PS
PIE
Received Data Register (RDR)
Received Shift Register
Read
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Transmit Shift Register
Write
RDI
TDO
(DATA REGISTER) DR
TRANSMITTER
CLOCK
RECEIVER
CLOCK
RECEIVER RATE
TRANSMITTER RATE
BRR
SCP1
f
CPU
CONTROL
CONTROL
SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
/PR
/16
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
SBK
RWU
RE
TE
ILIE
RIE
TCIE
TIE
CR2
ST72F324, ST72324B
92/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.4 Functional Description
The block diagram of the Serial Control Interface,
is shown in
Figure 54
. It contains 6 dedicated reg-
isters:
Two control registers (SCICR1 & SCICR2)
A status register (SCISR)
A baud rate register (SCIBRR)
An extended prescaler receiver register (SCIER-
PR)
An extended prescaler transmitter register (SCI-
ETPR)
Refer to the register descriptions in
Section
10.5.7
for the definitions of each bit.
10.5.4.1 Serial Data Format
Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9
bits by programming the M bit in the SCICR1 reg-
ister (see
Figure 54
).
The TDO pin is in low state during the start bit.
The TDO pin is in high state during the stop bit.
An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame
of "1"s followed by the start bit of the next frame
which contains data.
A Break character is interpreted on receiving "0"s
for some multiple of the frame period. At the end of
the last break frame the transmitter inserts an ex-
tra "1" bit to acknowledge the start bit.
Transmission and reception are driven by their
own baud rate generator.
Figure 55. Word Length Programming
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Start
Bit
Stop
Bit
Next
Start
Bit
Idle Frame
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Start
Bit
Stop
Bit
Next
Start
Bit
Start
Bit
Idle Frame
Start
Bit
9-bit Word length (M bit is set)
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)
Possible
Parity
Bit
Possible
Parity
Bit
Break Frame
Start
Bit
Extra
'1'
Data Frame
Break Frame
Start
Bit
Extra
'1'
Data Frame
Next Data Frame
Next Data Frame
ST72F324, ST72324B
93/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.4.2 Transmitter
The transmitter can send data words of either 8 or
9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the M
bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the 9th bit (the
MSB) has to be stored in the T8 bit in the SCICR1
register.
Character Transmission
During an SCI transmission, data shifts out least
significant bit first on the TDO pin. In this mode,
the SCIDR register consists of a buffer (TDR) be-
tween the internal bus and the transmit shift regis-
ter (see
Figure 54
).
Procedure
Select the M bit to define the word length.
Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR
and the SCIETPR registers.
Set the TE bit to assign the TDO pin to the alter-
nate function and to send a idle frame as first
transmission.
Access the SCISR register and write the data to
send in the SCIDR register (this sequence clears
the TDRE bit). Repeat this sequence for each
data to be transmitted.
Clearing the TDRE bit is always performed by the
following software sequence:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A write to the SCIDR register
The TDRE bit is set by hardware and it indicates:
The TDR register is empty.
The data transfer is beginning.
The next data can be written in the SCIDR regis-
ter without overwriting the previous data.
This flag generates an interrupt if the TIE bit is set
and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
When a transmission is taking place, a write in-
struction to the SCIDR register stores the data in
the TDR register and which is copied in the shift
register at the end of the current transmission.
When no transmission is taking place, a write in-
struction to the SCIDR register places the data di-
rectly in the shift register, the data transmission
starts, and the TDRE bit is immediately set.
When a frame transmission is complete (after the
stop bit or after the break frame) the TC bit is set
and an interrupt is generated if the TCIE is set and
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
Clearing the TC bit is performed by the following
software sequence:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A write to the SCIDR register
Note: The TDRE and TC bits are cleared by the
same software sequence.
Break Characters
Setting the SBK bit loads the shift register with a
break character. The break frame length depends
on the M bit (see
Figure 55
).
As long as the SBK bit is set, the SCI send break
frames to the TDO pin. After clearing this bit by
software the SCI insert a logic 1 bit at the end of
the last break frame to guarantee the recognition
of the start bit of the next frame.
Idle Characters
Setting the TE bit drives the SCI to send an idle
frame before the first data frame.
Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a trans-
mission sends an idle frame after the current word.
Note: Resetting and setting the TE bit causes the
data in the TDR register to be lost. Therefore the
best time to toggle the TE bit is when the TDRE bit
is set i.e. before writing the next byte in the SCIDR.
ST72F324, ST72324B
94/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.4.3 Receiver
The SCI can receive data words of either 8 or 9
bits. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits
and the MSB is stored in the R8 bit in the SCICR1
register.
Character reception
During a SCI reception, data shifts in least signifi-
cant bit first through the RDI pin. In this mode, the
SCIDR register consists or a buffer (RDR) be-
tween the internal bus and the received shift regis-
ter (see
Figure 54
).
Procedure
Select the M bit to define the word length.
Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR
and the SCIERPR registers.
Set the RE bit, this enables the receiver which
begins searching for a start bit.
When a character is received:
The RDRF bit is set. It indicates that the content
of the shift register is transferred to the RDR.
An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise
or an overrun error has been detected during re-
ception.
Clearing the RDRF bit is performed by the following
software sequence done by:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A read to the SCIDR register.
The RDRF bit must be cleared before the end of the
reception of the next character to avoid an overrun
error.
Break Character
When a break character is received, the SPI han-
dles it as a framing error.
Idle Character
When a idle frame is detected, there is the same
procedure as a data received character plus an in-
terrupt if the ILIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in
the CCR register.
Overrun Error
An overrun error occurs when a character is re-
ceived when RDRF has not been reset. Data can
not be transferred from the shift register to the
RDR register as long as the RDRF bit is not
cleared.
When a overrun error occurs:
The OR bit is set.
The RDR content will not be lost.
The shift register will be overwritten.
An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
The OR bit is reset by an access to the SCISR reg-
ister followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
Noise Error
Oversampling techniques are used for data recov-
ery by discriminating between valid incoming data
and noise. Normal data bits are considered valid if
three consecutive samples (8th, 9th, 10th) have
the same bit value, otherwise the NF flag is set. In
the case of start bit detection, the NF flag is set on
the basis of an algorithm combining both valid
edge detection and three samples (8th, 9th, 10th).
Therefore, to prevent the NF flag getting set during
start bit reception, there should be a valid edge de-
tection as well as three valid samples.
When noise is detected in a frame:
The NF flag is set at the rising edge of the RDRF
bit.
Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
SCIDR register.
No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself
generates an interrupt.
The NF flag is reset by a SCISR register read op-
eration followed by a SCIDR register read opera-
tion.
During reception, if a false start bit is detected (e.g.
8th, 9th, 10th samples are 011,101,110), the
frame is discarded and the receiving sequence is
not started for this frame. There is no RDRF bit set
for this frame and the NF flag is set internally (not
accessible to the user). This NF flag is accessible
along with the RDRF bit when a next valid frame is
received.
Note: If the application Start Bit is not long enough
to match the above requirements, then the NF
Flag may get set due to the short Start Bit. In this
case, the NF flag may be ignored by the applica-
tion software when the first valid byte is received.
See also
Section 10.5.4.10
.
ST72F324, ST72324B
95/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
Figure 56. SCI Baud Rate and Extended Prescaler Block Diagram
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
SCIETPR
SCIERPR
EXTENDED PRESCALER RECEIVER RATE CONTROL
EXTENDED PRESCALER TRANSMITTER RATE CONTROL
EXTENDED PRESCALER
CLOCK
CLOCK
RECEIVER RATE
TRANSMITTER RATE
SCIBRR
SCP1
f
CPU
CONTROL
CONTROL
SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
/PR
/16
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
EXTENDED RECEIVER PRESCALER REGISTER
EXTENDED TRANSMITTER PRESCALER REGISTER
ST72F324, ST72324B
96/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
Framing Error
A framing error is detected when:
The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the
expected time, following either a de-synchroni-
zation or excessive noise.
A break is received.
When the framing error is detected:
the FE bit is set by hardware
Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
SCIDR register.
No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself
generates an interrupt.
The FE bit is reset by a SCISR register read oper-
ation followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
10.5.4.4 Conventional Baud Rate Generation
The baud rate for the receiver and transmitter (Rx
and Tx) are set independently and calculated as
follows:
with:
PR = 1, 3, 4 or 13 (see SCP[1:0] bits)
TR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
(see SCT[2:0] bits)
RR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
(see SCR[2:0] bits)
All these bits are in the SCIBRR register.
Example: If f
CPU
is 8 MHz (normal mode) and if
PR=13 and TR=RR=1, the transmit and receive
baud rates are 38400 baud.
Note: the baud rate registers MUST NOT be
changed while the transmitter or the receiver is en-
abled.
10.5.4.5 Extended Baud Rate Generation
The extended prescaler option gives a very fine
tuning on the baud rate, using a 255 value prescal-
er, whereas the conventional Baud Rate Genera-
tor retains industry standard software compatibili-
ty.
The extended baud rate generator block diagram
is described in the
Figure 56
.
The output clock rate sent to the transmitter or to
the receiver will be the output from the 16 divider
divided by a factor ranging from 1 to 255 set in the
SCIERPR or the SCIETPR register.
Note: the extended prescaler is activated by set-
ting the SCIETPR or SCIERPR register to a value
other than zero. The baud rates are calculated as
follows:
with:
ETPR = 1,..,255 (see SCIETPR register)
ERPR = 1,.. 255 (see SCIERPR register)
10.5.4.6 Receiver Muting and Wake-up Feature
In multiprocessor configurations it is often desira-
ble that only the intended message recipient
should actively receive the full message contents,
thus reducing redundant SCI service overhead for
all non addressed receivers.
The non addressed devices may be placed in
sleep mode by means of the muting function.
Setting the RWU bit by software puts the SCI in
sleep mode:
All the reception status bits can not be set.
All the receive interrupts are inhibited.
A muted receiver may be awakened by one of the
following two ways:
by Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset,
by Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.
Receiver wakes-up by Idle Line detection when
the Receive line has recognised an Idle Frame.
Then the RWU bit is reset by hardware but the
IDLE bit is not set.
Receiver wakes-up by Address Mark detection
when it received a "1" as the most significant bit of
a word, thus indicating that the message is an ad-
dress. The reception of this particular word wakes
up the receiver, resets the RWU bit and sets the
RDRF bit, which allows the receiver to receive this
word normally and to use it as an address word.
Caution: In Mute mode, do not write to the
SCICR2 register. If the SCI is in Mute mode during
the read operation (RWU=1) and a address mark
wake up event occurs (RWU is reset) before the
write operation, the RWU bit will be set again by
this write operation. Consequently the address
byte is lost and the SCI is not woken up from Mute
mode.
Tx =
(16
*
PR)
*
TR
f
CPU
Rx =
(16
*
PR)
*
RR
f
CPU
Tx =
16
*
ETPR*(PR*TR)
f
CPU
Rx =
16
*
ERPR*(PR*RR)
f
CPU
ST72F324, ST72324B
97/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.4.7 Parity Control
Parity control (generation of parity bit in trasmis-
sion and and parity chencking in reception) can be
enabled by setting the PCE bit in the SCICR1 reg-
ister. Depending on the frame length defined by
the M bit, the possible SCI frame formats are as
listed in
Table 20
.
Table 20. Frame Formats
Legend: SB = Start Bit, STB = Stop Bit,
PB = Parity Bit
Note: In case of wake up by an address mark, the
MSB bit of the data is taken into account and not
the parity bit
Even parity: the parity bit is calculated to obtain
an even number of "1s" inside the frame made of
the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is
equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit.
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
0 if even parity is selected (PS bit = 0).
Odd parity: the parity bit is calculated to obtain an
odd number of "1s" inside the frame made of the 7
or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is equal to
0 or 1) and the parity bit.
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
1 if odd parity is selected (PS bit = 1).
Transmission mode: If the PCE bit is set then the
MSB bit of the data written in the data register is
not transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
Reception mode: If the PCE bit is set then the in-
terface checks if the received data byte has an
even number of "1s" if even parity is selected
(PS=0) or an odd number of "1s" if odd parity is se-
lected (PS=1). If the parity check fails, the PE flag
is set in the SCISR register and an interrupt is gen-
erated if PIE is set in the SCICR1 register.
10.5.4.8 SCI Clock Tolerance
During reception, each bit is sampled 16 times.
The majority of the 8th, 9th and 10th samples is
considered as the bit value. For a valid bit
detec-
tion, all the three samples should have the same
value otherwise the noise flag (NF) is set. For ex-
ample: if the 8th, 9th and 10th samples are 0, 1
and 1 respectively, then the bit value will be "1",
but the Noise Flag bit is be set because the three
samples values are not the same.
Consequently, the bit length must be long enough
so that the 8th, 9th and 10th samples have the de-
sired bit value. This means the clock frequency
should not vary more than 6/16 (37.5%) within one
bit. The sampling clock is resynchronized at each
start bit, so that when receiving 10 bits (one start
bit, 1 data byte, 1 stop bit), the clock deviation
must not exceed 3.75%.
Note: The internal sampling clock of the microcon-
troller samples the pin value on every falling edge.
Therefore, the internal sampling clock and the time
the application expects the sampling to take place
may be out of sync. For example: If the baud rate
is 15.625 kbaud (bit length is 64s), then the 8th,
9th and 10th samples will be at 28s, 32s & 36s
respectively (the first sample starting ideally at
0s). But if the falling edge of the internal clock oc-
curs just before the pin value changes, the sam-
ples would then be out of sync by ~4us. This
means the entire bit length must be at least 40s
(36s for the 10th sample + 4s for synchroniza-
tion with the internal sampling clock).
M bit
PCE bit
SCI frame
0
0
| SB | 8 bit data | STB |
0
1
| SB | 7-bit data | PB | STB |
1
0
| SB | 9-bit data | STB |
1
1
| SB | 8-bit data PB | STB |
ST72F324, ST72324B
98/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.4.9 Clock Deviation Causes
The causes which contribute to the total deviation
are:
D
TRA
: Deviation due to transmitter error (Local
oscillator error of the transmitter or the trans-
mitter is transmitting at a different baud rate).
D
QUANT
: Error due to the baud rate quantisa-
tion of the receiver.
D
REC
: Deviation of the local oscillator of the
receiver: This deviation can occur during the
reception of one complete SCI message as-
suming that the deviation has been compen-
sated at the beginning of the message.
D
TCL
: Deviation due to the transmission line
(generally due to the transceivers)
All the deviations of the system should be added
and compared to the SCI clock tolerance:
D
TRA
+ D
QUANT
+ D
REC
+ D
TCL
< 3.75%
10.5.4.10 Noise Error Causes
See also description of Noise error in
Section
10.5.4.3
.
Start bit
The noise flag (NF) is set during start bit reception
if one of the following conditions occurs:
1. A valid falling edge is not detected. A falling
edge is considered to be valid if the 3 consecu-
tive samples before the falling edge occurs are
detected as '1' and, after the falling edge
occurs, during the sampling of the 16 samples,
if one of the samples numbered 3, 5 or 7 is
detected as a "1".
2. During sampling of the 16 samples, if one of the
samples numbered 8, 9 or 10 is detected as a
"1".
Therefore, a valid Start Bit must satisfy both the
above conditions to prevent the Noise Flag getting
set.
Data Bits
The noise flag (NF) is set during normal data bit re-
ception if the following condition occurs:
During the sampling of 16 samples, if all three
samples numbered 8, 9 and10 are not the same.
The majority of the 8th, 9th and 10th samples is
considered as the bit value.
Therefore, a valid Data Bit must have samples 8, 9
and 10 at the same value to prevent the Noise
Flag getting set.
Figure 57. Bit Sampling in Reception Mode
RDI LINE
Sample
clock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13
14
15
16
sampled values
One bit time
6/16
7/16
7/16
ST72F324, ST72324B
99/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.5 Low Power Modes
10.5.6 Interrupts
The SCI interrupt events are connected to the
same interrupt vector.
These events generate an interrupt if the corre-
sponding Enable Control Bit is set and the inter-
rupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruc-
tion).
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on SCI.
SCI interrupts cause the device to exit
from Wait mode.
HALT
SCI registers are frozen.
In Halt mode, the SCI stops transmit-
ting/receiving until Halt mode is exit-
ed.
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit
from
Wait
Exit
from
Halt
Transmit Data Register
Empty
TDRE
TIE
Yes
No
Transmission Com-
plete
TC
TCIE
Yes
No
Received Data Ready
to be Read
RDRF
RIE
Yes
No
Overrun Error Detected
OR
Yes
No
Idle Line Detected
IDLE
ILIE
Yes
No
Parity Error
PE
PIE
Yes
No
ST72F324, ST72324B
100/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
10.5.7 Register Description
STATUS REGISTER (SCISR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1100 0000 (C0h)
Bit 7 = TDRE Transmit data register empty.
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
TDR register has been transferred into the shift
register. An interrupt is generated if the TIE bit=1
in the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software
sequence (an access to the SCISR register fol-
lowed by a write to the SCIDR register).
0: Data is not transferred to the shift register
1: Data is transferred to the shift register
Note: Data will not be transferred to the shift reg-
ister unless the TDRE bit is cleared.
Bit 6 = TC Transmission complete.
This bit is set by hardware when transmission of a
frame containing Data is complete. An interrupt is
generated if TCIE=1 in the SCICR2 register. It is
cleared by a software sequence (an access to the
SCISR register followed by a write to the SCIDR
register).
0: Transmission is not complete
1: Transmission is complete
Note: TC is not set after the transmission of a Pre-
amble or a Break.
Bit 5 = RDRF Received data ready flag.
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
RDR register has been transferred to the SCIDR
register. An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the
SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-
quence (an access to the SCISR register followed
by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: Data is not received
1: Received data is ready to be read
Bit 4 = IDLE Idle line detect.
This bit is set by hardware when a Idle Line is de-
tected. An interrupt is generated if the ILIE=1 in
the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-
quence (an access to the SCISR register followed
by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Idle Line is detected
1: Idle Line is detected
Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the
RDRF bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line oc-
curs).
Bit 3 = OR Overrun error.
This bit is set by hardware when the word currently
being received in the shift register is ready to be
transferred into the RDR register while RDRF=1.
An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the SCICR2
register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an
access to the SCISR register followed by a read to
the SCIDR register).
0: No Overrun error
1: Overrun error is detected
Note: When this bit is set RDR register content will
not be lost but the shift register will be overwritten.
Bit 2 = NF Noise flag.
This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected
on a received frame. It is cleared by a software se-
quence (an access to the SCISR register followed
by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No noise is detected
1: Noise is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-
self generates an interrupt.
Bit 1 = FE Framing error.
This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchroniza-
tion, excessive noise or a break character is de-
tected. It is cleared by a software sequence (an
access to the SCISR register followed by a read to
the SCIDR register).
0: No Framing error is detected
1: Framing error or break character is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-
self generates an interrupt. If the word currently
being transferred causes both frame error and
overrun error, it will be transferred and only the OR
bit will be set.
Bit 0 = PE Parity error.
This bit is set by hardware when a parity error oc-
curs in receiver mode. It is cleared by a software
sequence (a read to the status register followed by
an access to the SCIDR data register). An inter-
rupt is generated if PIE=1 in the SCICR1 register.
0: No parity error
1: Parity error
7
0
TDRE
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PE
ST72F324, ST72324B
101/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SCICR1)
Read/Write
Reset Value: x000 0000 (x0h)
Bit 7 = R8 Receive data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the received
word when M=1.
Bit 6 = T8 Transmit data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the transmit-
ted word when M=1.
Bit 5 = SCID Disabled for low power consumption
When this bit is set the SCI prescalers and outputs
are stopped and the end of the current byte trans-
fer in order to reduce power consumption.This bit
is set and cleared by software.
0: SCI enabled
1: SCI prescaler and outputs disabled
Bit 4 = M Word length.
This bit determines the word length. It is set or
cleared by software.
0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Note: The M bit must not be modified during a data
transfer (both transmission and reception).
Bit 3 = WAKE Wake-Up method.
This bit determines the SCI Wake-Up method, it is
set or cleared by software.
0: Idle Line
1: Address Mark
Bit 2 = PCE Parity control enable.
This bit selects the hardware parity control (gener-
ation and detection). When the parity control is en-
abled, the computed parity is inserted at the MSB
position (9th bit if M=1; 8th bit if M=0) and parity is
checked on the received data. This bit is set and
cleared by software. Once it is set, PCE is active
after the current byte (in reception and in transmis-
sion).
0: Parity control disabled
1: Parity control enabled
Bit 1 = PS Parity selection.
This bit selects the odd or even parity when the
parity generation/detection is enabled (PCE bit
set). It is set and cleared by software. The parity
will be selected after the current byte.
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
Bit 0 = PIE Parity interrupt enable.
This bit enables the interrupt capability of the hard-
ware parity control when a parity error is detected
(PE bit set). It is set and cleared by software.
0: Parity error interrupt disabled
1: Parity error interrupt enabled.
7
0
R8
T8
SCID
M
WAKE
PCE
PS
PIE
ST72F324, ST72324B
102/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (SCICR2)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00 h)
Bit 7 = TIE Transmitter interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever
TDRE=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 6 = TCIE Transmission complete interrupt ena-
ble
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in
the SCISR register
Bit 5 = RIE Receiver interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever OR=1
or RDRF=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 4 = ILIE Idle line interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1
in the SCISR register.
Bit 3 = TE Transmitter enable.
This bit enables the transmitter. It is set and
cleared by software.
0: Transmitter is disabled
1: Transmitter is enabled
Notes:
During transmission, a "0" pulse on the TE bit
("0" followed by "1") sends a preamble (idle line)
after the current word.
When TE is set there is a 1 bit-time delay before
the transmission starts.
Caution: The TDO pin is free for general purpose
I/O only when the TE and RE bits are both cleared
(or if TE is never set).
Bit 2 = RE Receiver enable.
This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared
by software.
0: Receiver is disabled
1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a
start bit
Bit 1 = RWU Receiver wake-up.
This bit determines if the SCI is in mute mode or
not. It is set and cleared by software and can be
cleared by hardware when a wake-up sequence is
recognized.
0: Receiver in Active mode
1: Receiver in Mute mode
Note: Before selecting Mute mode (setting the
RWU bit), the SCI must receive some data first,
otherwise it cannot function in Mute mode with
wakeup by idle line detection.
Bit 0 = SBK Send break.
This bit set is used to send break characters. It is
set and cleared by software.
0: No break character is transmitted
1: Break characters are transmitted
Note: If the SBK bit is set to "1" and then to "0", the
transmitter will send a BREAK word at the end of
the current word.
7
0
TIE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
ST72F324, ST72324B
103/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
DATA REGISTER (SCIDR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
Contains the Received or Transmitted data char-
acter, depending on whether it is read from or writ-
ten to.
The Data register performs a double function (read
and write) since it is composed of two registers,
one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception
(RDR).
The TDR register provides the parallel interface
between the internal bus and the output shift reg-
ister (see
Figure 54
).
The RDR register provides the parallel interface
between the input shift register and the internal
bus (see
Figure 54
).
BAUD RATE REGISTER (SCIBRR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bits 7:6= SCP[1:0] First SCI Prescaler
These 2 prescaling bits allow several standard
clock division ranges:
Bits 5:3 = SCT[2:0] SCI Transmitter rate divisor
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0
bits define the total division applied to the bus
clock to yield the transmit rate clock in convention-
al Baud Rate Generator mode.
Bits 2:0 = SCR[2:0] SCI Receiver rate divisor.
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP[1:0] bits
define the total division applied to the bus clock to
yield the receive rate clock in conventional Baud
Rate Generator mode.
7
0
DR7
DR6
DR5
DR4
DR3
DR2
DR1
DR0
7
0
SCP1
SCP0
SCT2
SCT1
SCT0
SCR2
SCR1
SCR0
PR Prescaling factor
SCP1
SCP0
1
0
0
3
0
1
4
1
0
13
1
1
TR dividing factor
SCT2
SCT1
SCT0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
8
0
1
1
16
1
0
0
32
1
0
1
64
1
1
0
128
1
1
1
RR Dividing factor
SCR2
SCR1
SCR0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
8
0
1
1
16
1
0
0
32
1
0
1
64
1
1
0
128
1
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
104/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd)
EXTENDED RECEIVE PRESCALER DIVISION
REGISTER (SCIERPR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00 h)
Allows setting of the Extended Prescaler rate divi-
sion factor for the receive circuit.
Bits 7:0 = ERPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Receive
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated
when a value different from 00h is stored in this
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see
Figure 56
) is divided by
the binary factor set in the SCIERPR register (in
the range 1 to 255).
The extended baud rate generator is not used af-
ter a reset.
EXTENDED TRANSMIT PRESCALER DIVISION
REGISTER (SCIETPR)
Read/Write
Reset Value:0000 0000 (00h)
Allows setting of the External Prescaler rate divi-
sion factor for the transmit circuit.
Bits 7:0 = ETPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Transmit
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated
when a value different from 00h is stored in this
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see
Figure 56
) is divided by
the binary factor set in the SCIETPR register (in
the range 1 to 255).
The extended baud rate generator is not used af-
ter a reset.
Table 21. Baudrate Selection
7
0
ERPR
7
ERPR
6
ERPR
5
ERPR
4
ERPR
3
ERPR
2
ERPR
1
ERPR
0
7
0
ETPR
7
ETPR
6
ETPR
5
ETPR
4
ETPR
3
ETPR
2
ETPR
1
ETPR
0
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Standard
Baud
Rate
Unit
f
CPU
Accuracy
vs. Standard
Prescaler
f
Tx
f
Rx
Communication frequency 8MHz
~0.16%
Conventional Mode
TR (or RR)=128, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 32, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 16, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 8, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 4, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 16, PR= 3
TR (or RR)= 2, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=13
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
10400
19200
38400
~300.48
~1201.92
~2403.84
~4807.69
~9615.38
~10416.67
~19230.77
~38461.54
Hz
~0.79%
Extended Mode
ETPR (or ERPR) = 35,
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=1
14400 ~14285.71
ST72F324, ST72324B
105/164
SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (Cont'd)
Table 22. SCI Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0050h
SCISR
Reset Value
TDRE
1
TC
1
RDRF
0
IDLE
0
OR
0
NF
0
FE
0
PE
0
0051h
SCIDR
Reset Value
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LSB
x
0052h
SCIBRR
Reset Value
SCP1
0
SCP0
0
SCT2
0
SCT1
0
SCT0
0
SCR2
0
SCR1
0
SCR0
0
0053h
SCICR1
Reset Value
R8
x
T8
0
SCID
0
M
0
WAKE
0
PCE
0
PS
0
PIE
0
0054h
SCICR2
Reset Value
TIE
0
TCIE
0
RIE
0
ILIE
0
TE
0
RE
0
RWU
0
SBK
0
0055h
SCIERPR
Reset Value
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
0057h
SCIPETPR
Reset Value
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
106/164
10.6 10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC)
10.6.1 Introduction
The on-chip Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) pe-
ripheral is a 10-bit, successive approximation con-
verter with internal sample and hold circuitry. This
peripheral has up to 16 multiplexed analog input
channels (refer to device pin out description) that
allow the peripheral to convert the analog voltage
levels from up to 16 different sources.
The result of the conversion is stored in a 10-bit
Data Register. The A/D converter is controlled
through a Control/Status Register.
10.6.2 Main Features
s
10-bit conversion
s
Up to 16 channels with multiplexed input
s
Linear successive approximation
s
Data register (DR) which contains the results
s
Conversion complete status flag
s
On/off bit (to reduce consumption)
The block diagram is shown in
Figure 58
.
Figure 58. ADC Block Diagram
CH2
CH1
EOC SPEED ADON
0
CH0
ADCCSR
AIN0
AIN1
ANALOG TO DIGITAL
CONVERTER
AINx
ANALOG
MUX
D4
D3
D5
D9
D8
D7
D6
D2
ADCDRH
4
DIV 4
f
ADC
f
CPU
D1
D0
ADCDRL
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
CH3
DIV 2
ST72F324, ST72324B
107/164
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont'd)
10.6.3 Functional Description
The conversion is monotonic, meaning that the re-
sult never decreases if the analog input does not
and never increases if the analog input does not.
If the input voltage (V
AIN
) is greater than V
AREF
(high-level voltage reference) then the conversion
result is FFh in the ADCDRH register and 03h in
the ADCDRL register (without overflow indication).
If the input voltage (V
AIN
) is lower than V
SSA
(low-
level voltage reference) then the conversion result
in the ADCDRH and ADCDRL registers is 00 00h.
The A/D converter is linear and the digital result of
the conversion is stored in the ADCDRH and AD-
CDRL registers. The accuracy of the conversion is
described in the Electrical Characteristics Section.
R
AIN
is the maximum recommended impedance
for an analog input signal. If the impedance is too
high, this will result in a loss of accuracy due to
leakage and sampling not being completed in the
alloted time.
10.6.3.1 A/D Converter Configuration
The analog input ports must be configured as in-
put, no pull-up, no interrupt. Refer to the I/O
ports chapter. Using these pins as analog inputs
does not affect the ability of the port to be read as
a logic input.
In the ADCCSR register:
Select the CS[3:0] bits to assign the analog
channel to convert.
10.6.3.2 Starting the Conversion
In the ADCCSR register:
Set the ADON bit to enable the A/D converter
and to start the conversion. From this time on,
the ADC performs a continuous conversion of
the selected channel.
When a conversion is complete:
The EOC bit is set by hardware.
The result is in the ADCDR registers.
A read to the ADCDRH resets the EOC bit.
To read the 10 bits, perform the following steps:
1. Poll the EOC bit
2. Read the ADCDRL register
3. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC
automatically.
Note: The data is not latched, so both the low and
the high data register must be read before the next
conversion is complete, so it is recommended to
disable interrupts while reading the conversion re-
sult.
To read only 8 bits, perform the following steps:
1. Poll the EOC bit
2. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC
automatically.
10.6.3.3 Changing the conversion channel
The application can change channels during con-
version. When software modifies the CH[3:0] bits
in the ADCCSR register, the current conversion is
stopped, the EOC bit is cleared, and the A/D con-
verter starts converting the newly selected chan-
nel.
10.6.4 Low Power Modes
Note: The A/D converter may be disabled by re-
setting the ADON bit. This feature allows reduced
power consumption when no conversion is need-
ed.
10.6.5 Interrupts
None.
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on A/D Converter
HALT
A/D Converter disabled.
After wakeup from Halt mode, the A/D
Converter requires a stabilization time
t
STAB
(see Electrical Characteristics)
before accurate conversions can be
performed.
ST72F324, ST72324B
108/164
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont'd)
10.6.6 Register Description
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (ADCCSR)
Read /Write (Except bit 7 read only)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7 = EOC End of Conversion
This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by hard-
ware when software reads the ADCDRH register
or writes to any bit of the ADCCSR register.
0: Conversion is not complete
1: Conversion complete
Bit 6 = SPEED ADC clock selection
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: f
ADC
= f
CPU
/4
1: f
ADC
= f
CPU
/2
Bit 5 = ADON A/D Converter on
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable ADC and stop conversion
1: Enable ADC and start conversion
Bit 4 = Reserved. Must be kept cleared.
Bit 3:0 = CH[3:0] Channel Selection
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
select the analog input to convert.
*The number of channels is device dependent. Refer to
the device pinout description.
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRH)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7:0 = D[9:2] MSB of Converted Analog Value
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRL)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 7:2 = Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 1:0 = D[1:0] LSB of Converted Analog Value
7
0
EOC
SPEED ADON
0
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
Channel Pin*
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
AIN0
0
0
0
0
AIN1
0
0
0
1
AIN2
0
0
1
0
AIN3
0
0
1
1
AIN4
0
1
0
0
AIN5
0
1
0
1
AIN6
0
1
1
0
AIN7
0
1
1
1
AIN8
1
0
0
0
AIN9
1
0
0
1
AIN10
1
0
1
0
AIN11
1
0
1
1
AIN12
1
1
0
0
AIN13
1
1
0
1
AIN14
1
1
1
0
AIN15
1
1
1
1
7
0
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D1
D0
ST72F324, ST72324B
109/164
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (Cont'd)
Table 23. ADC Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0070h
ADCCSR
Reset Value
EOC
0
SPEED
0
ADON
0
0
CH3
0
CH2
0
CH1
0
CH0
0
0071h
ADCDRH
Reset Value
D9
0
D8
0
D7
0
D6
0
D5
0
D4
0
D3
0
D2
0
0072h
ADCDRL
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
D1
0
D0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
110/164
11 INSTRUCTION SET
11.1 CPU ADDRESSING MODES
The CPU features 17 different addressing modes
which can be classified in 7 main groups:
The CPU Instruction set is designed to minimize
the number of bytes required per instruction: To do
so, most of the addressing modes may be subdi-
vided in two sub-modes called long and short:
Long addressing mode is more powerful be-
cause it can use the full 64 Kbyte address space,
however it uses more bytes and more CPU cy-
cles.
Short addressing mode is less powerful because
it can generally only access page zero (0000h -
00FFh range), but the instruction size is more
compact, and faster. All memory to memory in-
structions use short addressing modes only
(CLR, CPL, NEG, BSET, BRES, BTJT, BTJF,
INC, DEC, RLC, RRC, SLL, SRL, SRA, SWAP)
The ST7 Assembler optimizes the use of long and
short addressing modes.
Table 24. CPU Addressing Mode Overview
Addressing Mode
Example
Inherent
nop
Immediate
ld A,#$55
Direct
ld A,$55
Indexed
ld A,($55,X)
Indirect
ld A,([$55],X)
Relative
jrne loop
Bit operation
bset byte,#5
Mode
Syntax
Destination
Pointer
Address
(Hex.)
Pointer Size
(Hex.)
Length
(Bytes)
Inherent
nop
+ 0
Immediate
ld A,#$55
+ 1
Short
Direct
ld A,$10
00..FF
+ 1
Long
Direct
ld A,$1000
0000..FFFF
+ 2
No Offset
Direct
Indexed
ld A,(X)
00..FF
+ 0
Short
Direct
Indexed
ld A,($10,X)
00..1FE
+ 1
Long
Direct
Indexed
ld A,($1000,X)
0000..FFFF
+ 2
Short
Indirect
ld A,[$10]
00..FF
00..FF
byte
+ 2
Long
Indirect
ld A,[$10.w]
0000..FFFF
00..FF
word
+ 2
Short
Indirect
Indexed
ld A,([$10],X)
00..1FE
00..FF
byte
+ 2
Long
Indirect
Indexed
ld A,([$10.w],X)
0000..FFFF
00..FF
word
+ 2
Relative
Direct
jrne loop
PC+/-127
+ 1
Relative
Indirect
jrne [$10]
PC+/-127
00..FF
byte
+ 2
Bit
Direct
bset $10,#7
00..FF
+ 1
Bit
Indirect
bset [$10],#7
00..FF
00..FF
byte
+ 2
Bit
Direct
Relative
btjt $10,#7,skip
00..FF
+ 2
Bit
Indirect
Relative
btjt [$10],#7,skip
00..FF
00..FF
byte
+ 3
ST72F324, ST72324B
111/164
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont'd)
11.1.1 Inherent
All Inherent instructions consist of a single byte.
The opcode fully specifies all the required informa-
tion for the CPU to process the operation.
11.1.2 Immediate
Immediate instructions have two bytes, the first
byte contains the opcode, the second byte con-
tains the operand value.
11.1.3 Direct
In Direct instructions, the operands are referenced
by their memory address.
The direct addressing mode consists of two sub-
modes:
Direct (short)
The address is a byte, thus requires only one byte
after the opcode, but only allows 00 - FF address-
ing space.
Direct (long)
The address is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-
dressing space, but requires 2 bytes after the op-
code.
11.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long)
In this mode, the operand is referenced by its
memory address, which is defined by the unsigned
addition of an index register (X or Y) with an offset.
The indirect addressing mode consists of three
sub-modes:
Indexed (No Offset)
There is no offset, (no extra byte after the opcode),
and allows 00 - FF addressing space.
Indexed (Short)
The offset is a byte, thus requires only one byte af-
ter the opcode and allows 00 - 1FE addressing
space.
Indexed (long)
The offset is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-
dressing space and requires 2 bytes after the op-
code.
11.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long)
The required data byte to do the operation is found
by its memory address, located in memory (point-
er).
The pointer address follows the opcode. The indi-
rect addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:
Indirect (short)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a
byte, thus allowing 00 - FF addressing space, and
requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Indirect (long)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Inherent Instruction
Function
NOP
No operation
TRAP
S/W Interrupt
WFI
Wait For Interrupt (Low Pow-
er Mode)
HALT
Halt Oscillator (Lowest Power
Mode)
RET
Sub-routine Return
IRET
Interrupt Sub-routine Return
SIM
Set Interrupt Mask (level 3)
RIM
Reset Interrupt Mask (level 0)
SCF
Set Carry Flag
RCF
Reset Carry Flag
RSP
Reset Stack Pointer
LD
Load
CLR
Clear
PUSH/POP
Push/Pop to/from the stack
INC/DEC
Increment/Decrement
TNZ
Test Negative or Zero
CPL, NEG
1 or 2 Complement
MUL
Byte Multiplication
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,
RRC
Shift and Rotate Operations
SWAP
Swap Nibbles
Immediate Instruction
Function
LD
Load
CP
Compare
BCP
Bit Compare
AND, OR, XOR
Logical Operations
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC
Arithmetic Operations
ST72F324, ST72324B
112/164
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont'd)
11.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long)
This is a combination of indirect and short indexed
addressing modes. The operand is referenced by
its memory address, which is defined by the un-
signed addition of an index register value (X or Y)
with a pointer value located in memory. The point-
er address follows the opcode.
The indirect indexed addressing mode consists of
two sub-modes:
Indirect Indexed (Short)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a
byte, thus allowing 00 - 1FE addressing space,
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Indirect Indexed (Long)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Table 25. Instructions Supporting Direct,
Indexed, Indirect and Indirect Indexed
Addressing Modes
11.1.7 Relative mode (Direct, Indirect)
This addressing mode is used to modify the PC
register value, by adding an 8-bit signed offset to
it.
The relative addressing mode consists of two sub-
modes:
Relative (Direct)
The offset is following the opcode.
Relative (Indirect)
The offset is defined in memory, which address
follows the opcode.
Long and Short
Instructions
Function
LD
Load
CP
Compare
AND, OR, XOR
Logical Operations
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC
Arithmetic Additions/Sub-
stractions operations
BCP
Bit Compare
Short Instructions
Only
Function
CLR
Clear
INC, DEC
Increment/Decrement
TNZ
Test Negative or Zero
CPL, NEG
1 or 2 Complement
BSET, BRES
Bit Operations
BTJT, BTJF
Bit Test and Jump Opera-
tions
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,
RRC
Shift and Rotate Opera-
tions
SWAP
Swap Nibbles
CALL, JP
Call or Jump subroutine
Available Relative
Direct/Indirect
Instructions
Function
JRxx
Conditional Jump
CALLR
Call Relative
ST72F324, ST72324B
113/164
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont'd)
11.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS
The ST7 family devices use an Instruction Set
consisting of 63 instructions. The instructions may
be subdivided into 13 main groups as illustrated in
the following table:
Using a pre-byte
The instructions are described with one to four op-
codes.
In order to extend the number of available op-
codes for an 8-bit CPU (256 opcodes), three differ-
ent prebyte opcodes are defined. These prebytes
modify the meaning of the instruction they pre-
cede.
The whole instruction becomes:
PC-2
End of previous instruction
PC-1
Prebyte
PC
opcode
PC+1
Additional word (0 to 2) according
to the number of bytes required to compute the ef-
fective address
These prebytes enable instruction in Y as well as
indirect addressing modes to be implemented.
They precede the opcode of the instruction in X or
the instruction using direct addressing mode. The
prebytes are:
PDY 90
Replace an X based instruction
using immediate, direct, indexed, or inherent ad-
dressing mode by a Y one.
PIX 92
Replace an instruction using di-
rect, direct bit, or direct relative addressing mode
to an instruction using the corresponding indirect
addressing mode.
It also changes an instruction using X indexed ad-
dressing mode to an instruction using indirect X in-
dexed addressing mode.
PIY 91
Replace an instruction using X in-
direct indexed addressing mode by a Y one.
Load and Transfer
LD
CLR
Stack operation
PUSH
POP
RSP
Increment/Decrement
INC
DEC
Compare and Tests
CP
TNZ
BCP
Logical operations
AND
OR
XOR
CPL
NEG
Bit Operation
BSET
BRES
Conditional Bit Test and Branch
BTJT
BTJF
Arithmetic operations
ADC
ADD
SUB
SBC
MUL
Shift and Rotates
SLL
SRL
SRA
RLC
RRC
SWAP
SLA
Unconditional Jump or Call
JRA
JRT
JRF
JP
CALL
CALLR
NOP
RET
Conditional Branch
JRxx
Interruption management
TRAP
WFI
HALT
IRET
Condition Code Flag modification
SIM
RIM
SCF
RCF
ST72F324, ST72324B
114/164
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont'd)
Mnemo
Description
Function/Example
Dst
Src
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
ADC
Add with Carry
A = A + M + C
A
M
H
N
Z
C
ADD
Addition
A = A + M
A
M
H
N
Z
C
AND
Logical And
A = A . M
A
M
N
Z
BCP
Bit compare A, Memory
tst (A . M)
A
M
N
Z
BRES
Bit Reset
bres Byte, #3
M
BSET
Bit Set
bset Byte, #3
M
BTJF
Jump if bit is false (0)
btjf Byte, #3, Jmp1
M
C
BTJT
Jump if bit is true (1)
btjt Byte, #3, Jmp1
M
C
CALL
Call subroutine
CALLR
Call subroutine relative
CLR
Clear
reg, M
0
1
CP
Arithmetic Compare
tst(Reg - M)
reg
M
N
Z
C
CPL
One Complement
A = FFH-A
reg, M
N
Z
1
DEC
Decrement
dec Y
reg, M
N
Z
HALT
Halt
1
0
IRET
Interrupt routine return
Pop CC, A, X, PC
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
INC
Increment
inc X
reg, M
N
Z
JP
Absolute Jump
jp [TBL.w]
JRA
Jump relative always
JRT
Jump relative
JRF
Never jump
jrf *
JRIH
Jump if ext. INT pin = 1
(ext. INT pin high)
JRIL
Jump if ext. INT pin = 0
(ext. INT pin low)
JRH
Jump if H = 1
H = 1 ?
JRNH
Jump if H = 0
H = 0 ?
JRM
Jump if I1:0 = 11
I1:0 = 11 ?
JRNM
Jump if I1:0 <> 11
I1:0 <> 11 ?
JRMI
Jump if N = 1 (minus)
N = 1 ?
JRPL
Jump if N = 0 (plus)
N = 0 ?
JREQ
Jump if Z = 1 (equal)
Z = 1 ?
JRNE
Jump if Z = 0 (not equal)
Z = 0 ?
JRC
Jump if C = 1
C = 1 ?
JRNC
Jump if C = 0
C = 0 ?
JRULT
Jump if C = 1
Unsigned <
JRUGE
Jump if C = 0
Jmp if unsigned >=
JRUGT
Jump if (C + Z = 0)
Unsigned >
ST72F324, ST72324B
115/164
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont'd)
Mnemo
Description
Function/Example
Dst
Src
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
JRULE
Jump if (C + Z = 1)
Unsigned <=
LD
Load
dst <= src
reg, M
M, reg
N
Z
MUL
Multiply
X,A = X * A
A, X, Y
X, Y, A
0
0
NEG
Negate (2's compl)
neg $10
reg, M
N
Z
C
NOP
No Operation
OR
OR operation
A = A + M
A
M
N
Z
POP
Pop from the Stack
pop reg
reg
M
pop CC
CC
M
I1
H
I0
N
Z
C
PUSH
Push onto the Stack
push Y
M
reg, CC
RCF
Reset carry flag
C = 0
0
RET
Subroutine Return
RIM
Enable Interrupts
I1:0 = 10 (level 0)
1
0
RLC
Rotate left true C
C <= A <= C
reg, M
N
Z
C
RRC
Rotate right true C
C => A => C
reg, M
N
Z
C
RSP
Reset Stack Pointer
S = Max allowed
SBC
Substract with Carry
A = A - M - C
A
M
N
Z
C
SCF
Set carry flag
C = 1
1
SIM
Disable Interrupts
I1:0 = 11 (level 3)
1
1
SLA
Shift left Arithmetic
C <= A <= 0
reg, M
N
Z
C
SLL
Shift left Logic
C <= A <= 0
reg, M
N
Z
C
SRL
Shift right Logic
0 => A => C
reg, M
0
Z
C
SRA
Shift right Arithmetic
A7 => A => C
reg, M
N
Z
C
SUB
Substraction
A = A - M
A
M
N
Z
C
SWAP
SWAP nibbles
A7-A4 <=> A3-A0
reg, M
N
Z
TNZ
Test for Neg & Zero
tnz lbl1
N
Z
TRAP
S/W trap
S/W interrupt
1
1
WFI
Wait for Interrupt
1
0
XOR
Exclusive OR
A = A XOR M
A
M
N
Z
ST72F324, ST72324B
116/164
12 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
12.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all voltages are re-
ferred to V
SS
.
12.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values
Unless otherwise specified the minimum and max-
imum values are guaranteed in the worst condi-
tions of ambient temperature, supply voltage and
frequencies by tests in production on 100% of the
devices with an ambient temperature at T
A
=25C
and T
A
=T
A
max (given by the selected temperature
range).
Data based on characterization results, design
simulation and/or technology characteristics are
indicated in the table footnotes and are not tested
in production. Based on characterization, the min-
imum and maximum values refer to sample tests
and represent the mean value plus or minus three
times the standard deviation (mean3
).
12.1.2 Typical values
Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based
on T
A
=25C, V
DD
=5V. They are given only as de-
sign guidelines and are not tested.
12.1.3 Typical curves
Unless otherwise specified, all typical curves are
given only as design guidelines and are not tested.
12.1.4 Loading capacitor
The loading conditions used for pin parameter
measurement are shown in
Figure 59
.
Figure 59. Pin loading conditions
12.1.5 Pin input voltage
The input voltage measurement on a pin of the de-
vice is described in
Figure 60
.
Figure 60. Pin input voltage
C
L
ST7 PIN
V
IN
ST7 PIN
ST72F324, ST72324B
117/164
12.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Stresses above those listed as "absolute maxi-
mum ratings" may cause permanent damage to
the device. This is a stress rating only and func-
tional operation of the device under these condi-
tions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect device
reliability.
12.2.1 Voltage Characteristics
12.2.2 Current Characteristics
Notes:
1. Directly connecting the RESET and I/O pins to V
DD
or V
SS
could damage the device if an unintentional internal reset
is generated or an unexpected change of the I/O configuration occurs (for example, due to a corrupted program counter).
To guarantee safe operation, this connection has to be done through a pull-up or pull-down resistor (typical: 4.7k
for
RESET, 10k
for I/Os). For the same reason, unused I/O pins must not be directly tied to V
DD
or V
SS
.
2. I
INJ(PIN)
must never be exceeded. This is implicitly insured if V
IN
maximum is respected. If V
IN
maximum cannot be
respected, the injection current must be limited externally to the I
INJ(PIN)
value. A positive injection is induced by V
IN
>V
DD
while a negative injection is induced by V
IN
<V
SS
. For true open-drain pads, there is no positive injection current, and the
corresponding V
IN
maximum must always be respected
3. All power (V
DD
) and ground (V
SS
) lines must always be connected to the external supply.
4. Negative injection disturbs the analog performance of the device.
See note in
"ADC Accuracy" on page 146
.
For best reliability, it is recommended to avoid negative injection of more than 1.6mA.
5. When several inputs are submitted to a current injection, the maximum
I
INJ(PIN)
is the absolute sum of the positive
and negative injected currents (instantaneous values). These results are based on characterisation with
I
INJ(PIN)
maxi-
mum current injection on four I/O port pins of the device.
6. True open drain I/O port pins do not accept positive injection.
Symbol
Ratings
Maximum value
Unit
V
DD
- V
SS
Supply voltage
6.5
V
V
PP
- V
SS
Programming Voltage
13
V
IN
1) & 2)
Input Voltage on true open drain pin
V
SS
-0.3 to 6.5
Input voltage on any other pin
V
SS
-0.3 to V
DD
+0.3
|
V
DDx
| and |
V
SSx
|
Variations between different digital power pins
50
mV
|V
SSA
- V
SSx
|
Variations between digital and analog ground pins
50
V
ESD(HBM)
Electro-static discharge voltage (Human Body Model)
see
Section 12.8.3 on page 133
V
ESD(MM)
Electro-static discharge voltage (Machine Model)
Symbol
Ratings
Maximum value
Unit
I
VDD
Total current into V
DD
power lines
(source)
3)
32-pin devices
75
mA
44-pin devices
150
I
VSS
Total current out of V
SS
ground lines
(sink)
3)
32-pin devices
75
mA
44-pin devices
150
I
IO
Output current sunk by any standard I/O and control pin
25
mA
Output current sunk by any high sink I/O pin
50
Output current source by any I/Os and control pin
- 25
I
INJ(PIN)
2) & 4)
Injected current on V
PP
pin
5
Injected current on RESET pin
5
Injected current on OSC1 and OSC2 pins
5
Injected current on Flash device pin PB0
+5
Injected current on any other pin
5) & 6)
5
I
INJ(PIN)
2)
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)
5)
25
ST72F324, ST72324B
118/164
12.2.3 Thermal Characteristics
12.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS
12.3.1 Operating Conditions
Figure 61. f
CPU
Max Versus V
DD
Note: Some temperature ranges are only available with a specific package and memory size. Refer to Or-
dering Information.
Warning: Do not connect 12V to V
PP
before V
DD
is powered on, as this may damage the device.
Symbol
Ratings
Value
Unit
T
STG
Storage temperature range
-65 to +150
C
T
J
Maximum junction temperature (see
Section 13.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
)
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
f
CPU
Internal clock frequency
0
8
MHz
V
DD
Operating voltage (except Flash Write/
Erase)
3.8
5.5
V
Operating Voltage for Flash Write/Erase
V
PP
= 11.4 to 12.6V
4.5
5.5
T
A
Ambient temperature range
1 Suffix Version
0
70
C
5 Suffix Version
-10
85
6 or A Suffix Versions
-40
85
7 or B Suffix Versions
-40
105
C Suffix Version
-40
125
f
CPU
[MHz]
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]
8
4
2
1
0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.5
FUNCTIONALITY
FUNCTIONALITY
GUARANTEED
IN THIS AREA
NOT GUARANTEED
IN THIS AREA
3.8
6
(UNLESS
OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
IN THE TABLES
OF PARAMETRIC
DATA)
ST72F324, ST72324B
119/164
OPERATING CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
12.4 LVD/AVD CHARACTERISTICS
12.4.1 Low Voltage Detector (LVD) thresholds
Subject to general operating conditions for T
A
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production for ROM devices only.
2. If the medium or low thresholds are selected, the detection may occur outside the specified operating voltage range.
12.4.2 Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD) Thresholds
Subject to general operating conditions for T
A
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production for ROM devices only.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
IT+(LVD)
Reset release threshold
(V
DD
rise)
VD level = High in option byte
4.0
1)
4.2
4.5
V
VD level = Med. in option byte
2)
3.55
1)
3.75
4.0
1)
VD level = Low in option byte
2)
2.95
1)
3.15
3.35
1)
V
IT-(LVD)
Reset generation threshold
(V
DD
fall)
VD level = High in option byte
3.8
4.0
4.25
1)
VD level = Med. in option byte
2)
3.35
1)
3.55
3.75
1)
VD level = Low in option byte
2)
2.8
1)
3.0
3.15
1)
V
hys(LVD)
LVD voltage threshold hysteresis
1)
V
IT+(LVD)
-V
IT-(LVD)
150
200
250
mV
Vt
POR
V
DD
rise time
1)
6
20000
s/V
t
g(VDD)
Filtered glitch delay on V
DD
1)
Not detected by the LVD
40
ns
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
IT+(AVD)
1
0 AVDF flag toggle threshold
(V
DD
rise)
VD level = High in option byte
4.4
1)
4.6
4.9
V
VD level = Med. in option byte
VD level = Low in option byte
3.95
1)
3.4
1)
4.15
3.6
4.4
1)
3.8
1)
V
IT-(AVD)
0
1 AVDF flag toggle threshold
(V
DD
fall)
VD level = High in option byte
4.2
4.4
4.65
1)
VD level = Med. in option byte
VD level = Low in option byte
3.75
1)
3.2
1)
4.0
3.4
4.2
1)
3.6
1)
V
hys(AVD)
AVD voltage threshold hysteresis
V
IT+(AVD)
-V
IT-(AVD)
200
mV
V
IT-
Voltage drop between AVD flag set
and LVD reset activated
V
IT-(AVD)
-V
IT-(LVD)
450
mV
ST72F324, ST72324B
120/164
12.5 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS
The following current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature
range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consump-
tion, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode for which the clock is stopped).
12.5.1 CURRENT CONSUMPTION
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V
DD
max. and f
CPU
max.
2. Measurements are done in the following conditions:
- Progam executed from RAM, CPU running with RAM access.
The increase in consumption when executing from Flash
is 50%.
- All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V
DD
or V
SS
(no load)
- All peripherals in reset state.
- LVD disabled.
- Clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave.
- In SLOW and SLOW WAIT mode, f
CPU
is based on f
OSC
divided by 32.
To obtain the total current consumption of the device, add the clock source (
Section 12.6.3
) and the peripheral power
consumption (
Section 12.5.3
).
3. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with a static value at V
DD
or V
SS
(no load), LVD disabled. Data based
on characterization results, tested in production at V
DD
max. and f
CPU
max.
4. Data based on
characterisation results, not tested in production. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with
a static value at V
DD
or V
SS
(no load); clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, LVD disabled. To obtain
the total current consumption of the device, add the clock source consumption (
Section 12.6.3
).
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Flash Devices
32K ROM
Devices
16K ROM
Devices
Unit
Typ Max
1)
Typ Max
1)
Typ Max
1)
I
DD
Supply current in RUN
mode
2)
f
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=1MHz
f
OSC
=4MHz, f
CPU
=2MHz
f
OSC
=8MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz
f
OSC
=16MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz
1.3
2.0
3.6
7.1
3.0
5.0
8.0
15.0
0.55
1.10
2.20
4.38
0.87
1.75
3.5
7.0
0.46
0.93
1.9
3.7
0.69
1.4
2.7
5.5
mA
Supply current in
SLOW mode
2)
f
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=62.5kHz
f
OSC
=4MHz, f
CPU
=125kHz
f
OSC
=8MHz, f
CPU
=250kHz
f
OSC
=16MHz, f
CPU
=500kHz
600
700
800
1100
2700
3000
3600
4000
53
100
194
380
87
175
350
700
30
70
150
310
60
120
250
500
A
Supply current in WAIT
mode
2)
f
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=1MHz
f
OSC
=4MHz, f
CPU
=2MHz
f
OSC
=8MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz
f
OSC
=16MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz
1.0
1.5
2.5
4.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
0.31
0.61
1.22
2.44
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
0.22
0.45
0.91
1.82
0.37
0.75
1.5
3
mA
Supply current in
SLOW WAIT mode
2)
f
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=62.5kHz
f
OSC
=4MHz, f
CPU
=125kHz
f
OSC
=8MHz, f
CPU
=250kHz
f
OSC
=16MHz, f
CPU
=500kHz
580
650
770
1050
1200
1300
1800
2000
36
69
133
260
63
125
250
500
20
40
90
190
40
90
180
350
A
Supply current in HALT
mode
3)
-40C
T
A
+85C
<1
10
<1
10
<1
10
A
-40C
T
A
+125C
<1
50
<1
50
<1
50
I
DD
Supply current in AC-
TIVE-HALT mode
4)
f
OSC
=2MHz
f
OSC
=4MHz
f
OSC
=8MHz
f
OSC
=16MHz
80
160
325
650
No
max.
guaran-
teed
15
28
55
107
20
38
75
200
11
22
43
85
15
30
60
150
ST72F324, ST72324B
121/164
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.5.1.1 Power Consumption vs f
CPU
: Flash Devices
Figure 62. Typical I
DD
in RUN mode
Figure 63. Typical I
DD
in SLOW mode
Figure 64. Typical I
DD
in WAIT mode
Figure 65. Typ. I
DD
in SLOW-WAIT mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.5
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
m
A
)
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.20
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.5
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
m
A
)
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.5
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
m
A
)
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.20
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.5
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
m
A
)
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
ST72F324, ST72324B
122/164
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.5.1.2 Power Consumption vs f
CPU
: 16K ROM Devices
Figure 66. Typical I
DD
in RUN mode
Figure 67. Typical I
DD
in SLOW mode
Figure 68. Typical I
DD
in WAIT mode
Figure 69. Typ. I
DD
in SLOW-WAIT mode
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
3.8
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
5.4
5.6
Vdd (V)
Idd (A
)
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
0
100
200
300
400
500
3.8
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
5.4
5.6
Vdd (V)
Id
d
(
A
)
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3.8
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
5.4
5.6
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
A
)
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
0
50
100
150
200
250
3.8
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
5.4
5.6
Vdd (V)
I
dd (
A
)
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
ST72F324, ST72324B
123/164
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.5.2 Supply and Clock Managers
The previous current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature
range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consump-
tion, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode).
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results done with the external components specified in
Section 12.6.3
, not tested in
production.
2. As the oscillator is based on a current source, the consumption does not depend on the voltage.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Typ
Max
Unit
I
DD(RCINT)
Supply current of internal RC oscillator
625
A
I
DD(RES)
Supply current of resonator oscillator
1) & 2)
see
Section
12.6.3 on page
126
I
DD(CSS)
Clock security system supply current
V
DD
= 5V
250
A
I
DD(PLL)
PLL supply current
V
DD
= 5V
360
I
DD(LVD)
LVD supply current
V
DD
= 5V
150
300
ST72F324, ST72324B
124/164
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.5.3 On-Chip Peripherals
T
A
= 25C f
CPU
=4MHz.
Notes:
1. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration (timer counter running at f
CPU
/4) and timer
counter stopped (only TIMD bit set). Data valid for one timer.
2. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration (SPI disabled) and a permanent SPI master
communication at maximum speed (data sent equal to 55h). This measurement includes the pad toggling consump-
tion.
3. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between SCI low power state (SCID=1) and a permanent SCI data trans-
mit sequence.
4. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration and continuous A/D conversions.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Typ
Unit
I
DD(TIM)
16-bit Timer supply current
1)
V
DD
=
5.0V
50
A
I
DD(SPI)
SPI supply current
2)
V
DD
=
5.0V
400
I
DD(SCI)
SCI supply current
3)
V
DD
=
5.0V
400
I
DD(ADC)
ADC supply current when converting
4)
V
DD
=
5.0V
400
ST72F324, ST72324B
125/164
12.6 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
.
12.6.1 General Timings
12.6.2 External Clock Source
Figure 70. Typical Application with an External Clock Source
Notes:
1. Data based on typical application software.
2. Time measured between interrupt event and interrupt vector fetch.
t
c(INST)
is the number of t
CPU
cycles needed to finish
the current instruction execution.
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
1)
Max
Unit
t
c(INST)
Instruction cycle time
2
3
12
t
CPU
f
CPU
=8MHz
250
375
1500
ns
t
v(IT)
Interrupt reaction time
2)
t
v(IT)
=
t
c(INST)
+ 10
10
22
t
CPU
f
CPU
=8MHz
1.25
2.75
s
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
OSC1H
OSC1 input pin high level voltage
see
Figure 70
V
DD
-1
V
DD
V
V
OSC1L
OSC1 input pin low level voltage
V
SS
V
SS
+1
t
w(OSC1H)
t
w(OSC1L)
OSC1 high or low time
3)
5
ns
t
r(OSC1)
t
f(OSC1)
OSC1 rise or fall time
3)
15
I
L
OSC1 Input leakage current
V
SS
V
IN
V
DD
1
A
OSC1
OSC2
f
OSC
EXTERNAL
ST72XXX
CLOCK SOURCE
Not connected internally
V
OSC1L
V
OSC1H
t
r(OSC1)
t
f(OSC1)
t
w(OSC1H)
t
w(OSC1L)
I
L
90%
10%
ST72F324, ST72324B
126/164
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.6.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with four
different Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators. All
the information given in this paragraph are based
on characterization results with specified typical
external components. In the application, the reso-
nator and the load capacitors have to be placed as
close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to
minimize output distortion and start-up stabiliza-
tion time. Refer to the crystal/ceramic resonator
manufacturer for more details (frequency, pack-
age, accuracy...).
Figure 71. Typical Application with a Crystal or Ceramic Resonator
Notes:
1. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small R
S
value.
Refer to crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer for more details.
2. Data based on characterisation results, not tested in production.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
f
OSC
Oscillator Frequency
1)
LP: Low power oscillator
MP: Medium power oscillator
MS: Medium speed oscillator
HS: High speed oscillator
1
>2
>4
>8
2
4
8
16
MHz
R
F
Feedback resistor
2)
20
40
k
C
L1
C
L2
Recommended load capacitance ver-
sus equivalent serial resistance of the
crystal or ceramic resonator (R
S
)
R
S
=200
LP oscillator
R
S
=200
MP oscillator
R
S
=200
MS oscillator
R
S
=100
HS oscillator
22
22
18
15
56
46
33
33
pF
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Typ
Max
Unit
i
2
OSC2 driving current
V
IN
=V
SS
LP oscillator
MP oscillator
MS oscillator
HS oscillator
80
160
310
610
150
250
460
910
A
OSC2
OSC1
f
OSC
C
L1
C
L2
i
2
R
F
ST72XXX
RESONATOR
WHEN RESONATOR WITH
INTEGRATED CAPACITORS
ST72F324, ST72324B
127/164
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
Notes:
1. Resonator characteristics given by the ceramic resonator manufacturer.
2. t
SU(OSC)
is the typical oscillator start-up time measured between V
DD
=2.8V and the fetch of the first instruction (with a
quick V
DD
ramp-up from 0 to 5V (<50
s).
3. Resonators all have different characteristics. Contact the manufacturer to obtain the appropriate values of external
components and to verify oscillator performance.
4. 3rd overtone resonators require specific validation by the resonator manufacturer.
Oscil.
Typical Ceramic Resonators (information for guidance only)
C
L1
[pF]
C
L2
[pF]
t
SU(osc)
[ms]
2)
Reference
3)
Freq.
Characteristic
1)
Cera
mic
LP
MURA
TA
CSA2.00MG
2MHz
f
OSC
=[0.5%
tolerance
,0.3%
Ta
,
0.3%
aging
,
x.x%
correl
] 22
22
4
MP
CSA4.00MG
4MHz
f
OSC
=[0.5%
tolerance
,0.3%
Ta
,
0.3%
aging
,
x.x%
correl
] 22
22
2
MS
CSA8.00MTZ
8MHz
f
OSC
=[0.5%
tolerance
,0.5%
Ta
,
0.3%
aging
,
x.x%
correl
] 33
33
1
HS
CSA16.00MXZ040
4)
16MHz
f
OSC
=[0.5%
tolerance
,0.3%
Ta
,
0.3%
aging
,
x.x%
correl
] 33
33
0.7
ST72F324, ST72324B
128/164
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.6.4 RC Oscillators
Figure 72. Typical f
OSC(RCINT)
vs T
A
Note: To reduce disturbance to the RC oscillator,
it is recommended to place decoupling capacitors
between V
DD
and V
SS
as shown in
Figure 91
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
f
OSC (RCINT)
Internal RC oscillator frequency
See
Figure 72
T
A
=25C, V
DD
=5V
2
3.5
5.6
MHz
3
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.8
4
-45
0
25
70
130
T
A
(C)
f
O
S
C(
RCI
NT
)
(M
Hz)
Vdd = 5V
Vdd = 5.5V
ST72F324, ST72324B
129/164
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.6.5 Clock Security System (CSS)
Note:
1. Data based on characterization results.
12.6.6 PLL Characteristics
Note:
1. Data characterized but not tested.
The user must take the PLL jitter into account in the application (for example in serial communication or
sampling of high frequency signals). The PLL jitter is a periodic effect, which is integrated over several
CPU cycles. Therefore the longer the period of the application signal, the less it will be impacted by the
PLL jitter.
Figure 73
shows the PLL jitter integrated on application signals in the range 125kHz to 2MHz. At frequen-
cies of less than 125KHz, the jitter is negligible.
Figure 73. Integrated PLL Jitter vs signal frequency
1
Note 1: Measurement conditions: f
CPU
= 8MHz.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
f
SFOSC
Safe Oscillator Frequency
1)
3
MHz
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
f
OSC
PLL input frequency range
2
4
MHz
f
CPU
/
f
CPU
Instantaneous PLL jitter
1)
ROM ST72324B,
f
OSC
= 4 MHz.
0.7
2
%
Flash ST72F324,
f
OSC
= 4 MHz.
1.0
2.5
Flash ST72F324,
f
OSC
= 2 MHz.
2.5
4.0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
4 MHz
2 MHz
1 MHz 500 kHz 250 kHz 125 kHz
Application Frequency
+/-Jitter (%)
FLASH typ
ROM max
ROM typ
ST72F324, ST72324B
130/164
12.7 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS
12.7.1 RAM and Hardware Registers
12.7.2 FLASH Memory
Notes:
1. Minimum V
DD
supply voltage without losing data stored in RAM (in HALT mode or under RESET) or in hardware reg-
isters (only in HALT mode). Not tested in production.
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
3. V
PP
must be applied only during the programming or erasing operation and not permanently for reliability reasons.
4. Data based on simulation results, not tested in production.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
RM
Data retention mode
1)
HALT mode (or RESET)
1.6
V
DUAL VOLTAGE HDFLASH MEMORY
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
2)
Typ
Max
2)
Unit
f
CPU
Operating frequency
Read mode
0
8
MHz
Write / Erase mode
1
8
V
PP
Programming voltage
3)
4.5V
V
DD
5.5V
11.4
12.6
V
I
DD
Supply current
4)
Write / Erase
0
mA
I
PP
V
PP
current
4)
Read (V
PP
=12V)
200
A
Write / Erase
30
mA
t
VPP
Internal
V
PP
stabilization time
10
s
t
RET
Data retention
T
A
=55C
20
years
N
RW
Write erase cycles
T
A
=25C
100
cycles
T
PROG
T
ERASE
Programming or erasing tempera-
ture range
-40
25
85
C
ST72F324, ST72324B
131/164
12.8 EMC CHARACTERISTICS
Susceptibility tests are performed on a sample ba-
sis during product characterization.
12.8.1 Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic
Susceptibility)
Based on a simple running application on the
product (toggling 2 LEDs through I/O ports), the
product is stressed by two electro magnetic events
until a failure occurs (indicated by the LEDs).
s
ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and
negative) is applied on all pins of the device until
a functional disturbance occurs. This test
conforms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.
s
FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive
and negative) is applied to V
DD
and V
SS
through
a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance
occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-
4 standard.
A device reset allows normal operations to be re-
sumed. The test results are given in the table be-
low based on the EMS levels and classes defined
in application note AN1709.
12.8.1.1 Designing hardened software to avoid
noise problems
EMC characterization and optimization are per-
formed at component level with a typical applica-
tion environment and simplified MCU software. It
should be noted that good EMC performance is
highly dependent on the user application and the
software in particular.
Therefore it is recommended that the user applies
EMC software optimization and prequalification
tests in relation with the EMC level requested for
his application.
Software recommendations:
The software flowchart must include the manage-
ment of runaway conditions such as:
Corrupted program counter
Unexpected reset
Critical Data corruption (control registers...)
Prequalification trials:
Most of the common failures (unexpected reset
and program counter corruption) can be repro-
duced by manually forcing a low state on the RE-
SET pin or the Oscillator pins for 1 second.
To complete these trials, ESD stress can be ap-
plied directly on the device, over the range of
specification values. When unexpected behaviour
is detected, the software can be hardened to pre-
vent unrecoverable errors occurring (see applica-
tion note AN1015)
.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Level/
Class
V
FESD
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin to induce a
functional disturbance
Flash or 32K ROM device, V
DD
=
5V,
T
A
=
+25C, f
OSC
=
8MHz
conforms to IEC 1000-4-2
3B
8 or 16K ROM device, V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25C,
f
OSC
=
8MHz conforms to IEC 1000-4-2
4A
V
FFTB
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be applied
through 100pF on V
DD
and V
DD
pins to induce a func-
tional disturbance
V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25C, f
OSC
=
8MHz
conforms to IEC 1000-4-4
4A
ST72F324, ST72324B
132/164
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.8.2 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)
Based on a simple application running on the
product (toggling 2 LEDs through the I/O ports),
the product is monitored in terms of emission. This
emission test is in line with the norm SAE J 1752/
3 which specifies the board and the loading of
each pin.
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Refer to Application Note AN1709 for data on other package types.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Device/ Package
Monitored
Frequency Band
Max vs. [f
OSC
/f
CPU
]
Unit
8/4MHz
16/8MHz
S
EMI
Peak level
V
DD
=
5V,
T
A
=
+25C
conforming to
SAE J 1752/3
Flash/TQFP44
0.1MHz to 30MHz
20
21
dB
V
30MHz to 130MHz
26
31
130MHz to 1GHz
22
28
SAE EMI Level
3.5
4.0
-
Flash/TQFP32
0.1MHz to 30MHz
25
27
dB
V
30MHz to 130MHz
30
36
130MHz to 1GHz
18
23
SAE EMI Level
3.0
3.5
-
32K ROM/TQFP44
0.1MHz to 30MHz
16
21
dB
V
30MHz to 130MHz
24
29
130MHz to 1GHz
14
21
SAE EMI Level
3.0
3.5
-
8/16K ROM/
TQFP44
0.1MHz to 30MHz
12
15
dB
V
30MHz to 130MHz
23
26
130MHz to 1GHz
15
20
SAE EMI Level
3.0
3.5
-
ST72F324, ST72324B
133/164
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.8.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical
Sensitivity)
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU)
using specific measurement methods, the product
is stressed in order to determine its performance in
terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, re-
fer to the application note AN1181.
12.8.3.1 Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
Electro-Static Discharges (a positive then a nega-
tive pulse separated by 1 second) are applied to
the pins of each sample according to each pin
combination. The sample size depends on the
number of supply pins in the device (3 parts*(n+1)
supply pin). Two models can be simulated: Human
Body Model and Machine Model. This test con-
forms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
12.8.3.2 Static and Dynamic Latch-Up
s
LU: 3 complementary static tests are required
on 10 parts to assess the latch-up performance.
A supply overvoltage (applied to each power
supply pin) and a current injection (applied to
each input, output and configurable I/O pin) are
performed on each sample. This test conforms
to the EIA/JESD 78 IC latch-up standard. For
more details, refer to the application note
AN1181.
s
DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive
then one negative test) are applied to each pin
of 3 samples when the micro is running to
assess the latch-up performance in dynamic
mode. Power supplies are set to the typical
values, the oscillator is connected as near as
possible to the pins of the micro and the
component is put in reset mode. This test
conforms to the IEC1000-4-2 and SAEJ1752/3
standards. For more details, refer to the
application note AN1181.
Electrical Sensitivities
Notes:
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC spec-
ifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the
JEDEC criteria (international standard).
Symbol
Ratings
Conditions
Maximum value
1)
Unit
V
ESD(HBM)
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Human Body Model)
T
A
=
+25C
2500
V
V
ESD(MM)
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Machine Model)
T
A
=
+25C
250
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Class
1)
LU
Static latch-up class
T
A
=
+25C
T
A
=
+85C
T
A
=
+125C
A
A
A
DLU
Dynamic latch-up class
V
DD
=
5.5V, f
OSC
=
4MHz, T
A
=
+25C
A
ST72F324, ST72324B
134/164
12.9 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS
12.9.1 General Characteristics
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
OSC
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.
3. When the current limitation is not possible, the V
IN
maximum must be respected, otherwise refer to I
INJ(PIN)
specifica-
tion. A positive injection is induced by V
IN
>V
DD
while a negative injection is induced by V
IN
<V
SS
. Refer to
Section 12.2.2
on page 117
for more details.
4. Configuration not recommended, all unused pins must be kept at a fixed voltage: using the output mode of the I/O for
example or an external pull-up or pull-down resistor (see
Figure 74
). Data based on design simulation and/or technology
characteristics, not tested in production.
5. The R
PU
pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I
PU
current characteristics de-
scribed in
Figure 75
).
6. To generate an external interrupt, a minimum pulse width has to be applied on an I/O port pin configured as an external
interrupt source.
Figure 74. Connecting Unused I/O Pins
Figure 75. Typical I
PU
vs. V
DD
with V
IN
=V
SS
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
IL
Input low level voltage (standard
voltage devices)
1)
0.3xV
DD
V
V
IH
Input high level voltage
1)
0.7xV
DD
V
V
hys
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis
2)
0.7
I
INJ(PIN)
3)
Injected Current on Flash device pin
PB0
V
DD
=5V
0
+4
mA
Injected Current on other I/O pins
4
I
INJ(PIN)
3)
Total injected current (sum of all I/O
and control pins)
25
I
lkg
Input leakage current
V
SS
V
IN
V
DD
1
A
I
S
Static current consumption
Floating input mode
4)
200
R
PU
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor
5)
V
IN
=
V
SS
V
DD
=5V
50
120
250
k
C
IO
I/O pin capacitance
5
pF
t
f(IO)out
Output high to low level fall time
1)
C
L
=50pF
Between 10% and 90%
25
ns
t
r(IO)out
Output low to high level rise time
1)
25
t
w(IT)in
External interrupt pulse time
6)
1
t
CPU
10k
UNUSED I/O PORT
ST72XXX
10k
UNUSED I/O PORT
ST72XXX
V
DD
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
V dd(V )
I
pu(
u
A
)
Ta=1 40C
Ta=9 5C
Ta=2 5C
Ta=-45 C
ST72F324, ST72324B
135/164
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.9.2 Output Driving Current
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Figure 76. Typical V
OL
at V
DD
=5V (std. ports)
Figure 77. Typ. V
OL
at V
DD
=5V (high-sink ports)
Figure 78. Typical V
OH
at V
DD
=5V
Notes:
1. The I
IO
current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in
Section 12.2.2
and the sum of I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VSS
.
2. The I
IO
current sourced must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in
Section 12.2.2
and the sum of
I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VDD
. True open drain I/O pins do not have V
OH
.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
V
OL
1)
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin
when 8 pins are sunk at same time
(see
Figure 76
)
V
DD
=5V
I
IO
=+5mA
1.2
V
I
IO
=+2mA
0.5
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin
when 4 pins are sunk at same time
(see
Figure 77
and
Figure 79
)
I
IO
=+20mA, T
A
85C
T
A
>
85C
1.3
1.5
I
IO
=+8mA
0.6
V
OH
2)
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin
when 4 pins are sourced at same time
(see
Figure 78
and
Figure 81
)
I
IO
=-5mA,
T
A
85C
T
A
>
85C
V
DD
-1.4
V
DD
-1.6
I
IO
=-2mA
V
DD
-0.7
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0
0.005
0.0 1
0.01 5
Iio(A)
V
o
l (V
) at
V
d
d
=
5
V
Ta=140C "
Ta=95C
Ta=25C
Ta=-45C
5
10
15
I
IO
(mA)
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
Iio(A)
V
o
l
(
V)
a
t
Vd
d
=
5
V
Ta= 140 C
Ta= 95 C
Ta= 25 C
Ta= -45C
10
20
30
I
IO
(mA)
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
-0.01
-0.008 -0.006 -0.004 -0.002
0
Iio (A)
Vd
d-
Vo
h
(
V
)
a
t
Vd
d
=
5V
V dd= 5V 1 40C m in
V dd= 5v 95C m in
V dd= 5v 25C m in
V dd= 5v -4 5C m in
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
I
IO
(mA)
ST72F324, ST72324B
136/164
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
Figure 79. Typical V
OL
vs. V
DD
(std. ports)
Figure 80. Typical V
OL
vs. V
DD
(high-sink ports)
Figure 81. Typical V
OH
vs. V
DD
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Vd d(V )
Vo
l
(
V
)
a
t
I
i
o
=
5
m
A
Ta= -4 5C
Ta= 25C
Ta= 95C
Ta= 140 C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
2
2 .5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Vd d(V)
V
o
l
(
V)
at

I
i
o
=
2m
A
Ta=-4 5C
Ta=2 5C
Ta=9 5C
Ta=1 40C
0
0 .1
0 .2
0 .3
0 .4
0 .5
0 .6
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Vdd (V )
V
o
l
(
V
)
at

I
i
o=
8m
A
Ta= 14 0C
Ta=9 5C
Ta=2 5C
Ta=-45 C
0
0 .2
0 .4
0 .6
0 .8
1
1 .2
1 .4
1 .6
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
V dd(V )
V
o
l
(
V
)
at

I
i
o
=
20
m
A
Ta= 140 C
Ta=95 C
Ta=25 C
Ta=-45C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Vdd(V)
Vd
d
-
V
o
h
(
V)
a
t

I
i
o
=
-
5
m
A
Ta= -45C
Ta= 25C
Ta= 95C
Ta= 140C
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Vdd(V)
Vd
d-
Voh
(
V
)
a
t
I
i
o
=
-
2
m
A
Ta= -45C
Ta= 25C
Ta= 95C
Ta= 140C
ST72F324, ST72324B
137/164
12.10 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS
12.10.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels.
3. The I
IO
current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in
Section 12.2.2
and the sum of I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VSS
.
4. To guarantee the reset of the device, a minimum pulse has to be applied to the RESET pin. All short pulses applied on
the RESET pin with a duration below t
h(RSTL)in
can be ignored.
5. The reset network (the resistor and two capacitors) protects the device against parasitic resets, especially in noisy en-
vironments.
6. Data guaranteed by design, not tested in production.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
IL
Input low level voltage
1)
0.3xV
DD
V
V
IH
Input high level voltage
1)
0.7xV
DD
V
hys
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis
2)
2.5
V
OL
Output low level voltage
3)
V
DD
=5V
I
IO
=+2mA
0.2
0.5
V
I
IO
Driving current on RESET pin
2
mA
R
ON
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor
V
DD
=5V
20
30
120
k
t
w(RSTL)out
Generated reset pulse duration
Internal reset sources
20
30
42
6)
s
t
h(RSTL)in
External reset pulse hold time
4)
2.5
s
t
g(RSTL)in
Filtered glitch duration
5)
200
ns
ST72F324, ST72324B
138/164
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
Figure 82.
RESET pin
protection when LVD is enabled.
1)2)3)4)5)
Figure 83. RESET pin
protection when LVD is disabled.
1)2)3)
1. The reset network protects the device against parasitic resets.
2. The output of the external reset circuit must have an open-drain output to drive the ST7 reset pad. Otherwise the device
can be damaged when the ST7 generates an internal reset (LVD or watchdog).
3. Whatever the reset source is (internal or external), the user must ensure that the level on the RESET pin can go below
the V
IL
max. level specified in
Section 12.10.1
. Otherwise the reset will not be taken into account internally.
4. Because the reset circuit is designed to allow the internal RESET to be output in the RESET pin, the user must ensure
that the current sunk on the RESET pin (by an external pull-up for example) is less than the absolute maximum value
specified for I
INJ(RESET)
in
Section 12.2.2 on page 117
.
5. When the LVD is enabled, it is mandatory not to to connect a pull-up resistor and a capacitor to V
DD
on the RESET pin.
0.01
F
ST72XXX
PULSE
GENERATOR
Filter
R
ON
V
DD
WATCHDOG
LVD RESET
INTERNAL
RESET
RESET
EXTERNAL
Recommended
0.01
F
V
DD
0.01
F
EXTERNAL
RESET
CIRCUIT
USER
V
DD
4.7k
Required
Recommended
ST72XXX
PULSE
GENERATOR
Filter
R
ON
V
DD
WATCHDOG
INTERNAL
RESET
ST72F324, ST72324B
139/164
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.10.2 ICCSEL/V
PP
Pin
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Figure 84. Two typical Applications with ICCSEL/V
PP
Pin
2)
Notes:
1. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.
2. When ICC mode is not required by the application ICCSEL/V
PP
pin must be tied to V
SS
.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
V
IL
Input low level voltage
1)
FLASH versions
V
SS
0.2
V
ROM versions
V
SS
0.3xV
DD
V
IH
Input high level voltage
1)
FLASH versions
V
DD
-0.1
12.6
ROM versions
0.7xV
DD
V
DD
I
L
Input leakage current
V
IN
=V
SS
1
A
ICCSEL/V
PP
ST72XXX
10k
PROGRAMMING
TOOL
V
PP
ST72XXX
ST72F324, ST72324B
140/164
12.11 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
OSC
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics (out-
put compare, input capture, external clock, PWM output...).
Data based on design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.
12.11.1 16-Bit Timer
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
t
w(ICAP)in
Input capture pulse time
1
t
CPU
t
res(PWM)
PWM resolution time
2
t
CPU
f
CPU
=8MHz
250
ns
f
EXT
Timer external clock frequency
0
f
CPU
/4
MHz
f
PWM
PWM repetition rate
0
f
CPU
/4
MHz
Res
PWM
PWM resolution
16
bit
ST72F324, ST72324B
141/164
12.12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
12.12.1 SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified. Data based on
design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.
When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave
mode) has its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends on the I/O port
configuration. Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function char-
acteristics (SS, SCK, MOSI, MISO).
Figure 85. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=0
1)
Notes:
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV
DD
and 0.7xV
DD
.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
f
SCK
1/t
c(SCK)
SPI clock frequency
Master
f
CPU
=8MHz
f
CPU
/128
0.0625
f
CPU
/4
2
MHz
Slave
f
CPU
=8MHz
0
f
CPU
/2
4
t
r(SCK)
t
f(SCK)
SPI clock rise and fall time
see I/O port pin description
t
su(SS)
SS setup time
Slave
120
ns
t
h(SS)
SS hold time
Slave
120
t
w(SCKH)
t
w(SCKL)
SCK high and low time
Master
Slave
100
90
t
su(MI)
t
su(SI)
Data input setup time
Master
Slave
100
100
t
h(MI)
t
h(SI)
Data input hold time
Master
Slave
100
100
t
a(SO)
Data output access time
Slave
0
120
t
dis(SO)
Data output disable time
Slave
240
t
v(SO)
Data output valid time
Slave (after enable edge)
90
t
h(SO)
Data output hold time
0
t
v(MO)
Data output valid time
Master (before capture edge)
0.25
t
CPU
t
h(MO)
Data output hold time
0.25
SS
INPUT
SC
K
INP
U
T
CPHA=0
MOSI
INPUT
MISO
OUTPUT
CPHA=0
t
c(SCK)
t
w(SCKH)
t
w(SCKL)
t
r(SCK)
t
f(SCK)
t
v(SO)
t
a(SO)
t
su(SI)
t
h(SI)
MSB OUT
MSB IN
BIT6 OUT
LSB IN
LSB OUT
see note 2
CPOL=0
CPOL=1
t
su(SS)
t
h(SS)
t
dis(SO)
t
h(SO)
see
note 2
BIT1 IN
ST72F324, ST72324B
142/164
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
Figure 86. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=1
1)
Figure 87. SPI Master Timing Diagram
1)
Notes:
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV
DD
and 0.7xV
DD
.
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends of the I/O port configuration.
SS
INPUT
SC
K
INP
U
T
CPHA=1
MOSI
INPUT
MISO
OUTPUT
CPHA=1
t
w(SCKH)
t
w(SCKL)
t
r(SCK)
t
f(SCK)
t
a(SO)
t
su(SI)
t
h(SI)
MSB OUT
BIT6 OUT
LSB OUT
see
CPOL=0
CPOL=1
t
su(SS)
t
h(SS)
t
dis(SO)
t
h(SO)
see
note 2
note 2
t
c(SCK)
HZ
t
v(SO)
MSB IN
LSB IN
BIT1 IN
SS
INPUT
SC
K
INP
U
T
CPHA=0
MOSI
OUTPUT
MISO
INPUT
CPHA=0
CPHA=1
CPHA=1
t
c(SCK)
t
w(SCKH)
t
w(SCKL)
t
h(MI)
t
su(MI)
t
v(MO)
t
h(MO)
MSB IN
MSB OUT
BIT6 IN
BIT6 OUT
LSB OUT
LSB IN
see note 2
see note 2
CPOL=0
CPOL=1
CPOL=0
CPOL=1
t
r(SCK)
t
f(SCK)
ST72F324, ST72324B
143/164
12.13 10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Notes:
1. Any added external serial resistor will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10k
). Data
based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2.For Flash ST72F324 devices: injecting negative current on any of the analog input pins significantly reduces the accu-
racy of any conversion being performed on any analog input.
Analog pins of ST72F324 devices can be protected against
negative injection by adding a Schottky diode (pin to ground). Injecting negative current on digital input pins degrades
ADC accuracy especially if performed on a pin close to the analog input pins. Any positive injection current within the
limits specified for I
INJ(PIN)
and
I
INJ(PIN)
in
Section 12.9
does not affect the ADC accuracy.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
f
ADC
ADC clock frequency
0.4
2
MHz
V
AREF
Analog reference voltage
0.7*V
DD
V
AREF
V
DD
3.8
V
DD
V
V
AIN
Conversion voltage range
1)
V
SSA
V
AREF
I
lkg
Positive input leakage current for analog
input
-40C
T
A
85C range
250
nA
Other T
A
ranges
1
A
Negative input leakage current on ro-
bust analog pins (ROM devices only)
2
V
IN
<
V
SS,
| I
IN
|< 400A
on adjacent robust ana-
log pin
5
6
A
R
AIN
External input impedance
see
Figure 88
and
Figure
89
2)3)4)
k
C
AIN
External capacitor on analog input
pF
f
AIN
Variation freq. of analog input signal
Hz
C
ADC
Internal sample and hold capacitor
12
pF
t
ADC
Conversion time (Sample+Hold)
f
CPU
=8MHz, SPEED=0 f
ADC
=2MHz
7.5
s
t
ADC
- No of sample capacitor loading cycles
- No. of Hold conversion cycles
4
11
1/f
ADC
ST72F324, ST72324B
144/164
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
Figure 88. R
AIN
max. vs f
ADC
with C
AIN
=0pF
1)
Figure 89. Recommended C
AIN
& R
AIN values.
2)
Figure 90. Typical A/D Converter Application
Notes:
1. C
PARASITIC
represents the capacitance of the PCB (dependent on soldering and PCB layout quality) plus the pad ca-
pacitance (3pF). A high C
PARASITIC
value will downgrade conversion accuracy. To remedy this, f
ADC
should be reduced.
2. This graph shows that depending on the input signal variation (f
AIN
), C
AIN
can be increased for stabilization time and
decreased to allow the use of a larger serial resistor (R
AIN)
.
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0
10
30
70
C
PARASITIC
(pF)
Max
.
R
AI
N
(
K
ohm)
2 MHz
1 MHz
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0.01
0.1
1
10
f
AIN
(KHz)
Max
.
R
AI
N
(
K
ohm)
Cain 10 nF
Cain 22 nF
Cain 47 nF
AINx
ST72XXX
V
DD
I
L
1
A
V
T
0.6V
V
T
0.6V
C
ADC
12pF
V
AIN
R
AIN
10-Bit A/D
Conversion
2k
(
max
)
C
AIN
ST72F324, ST72324B
145/164
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.13.1 Analog Power Supply and Reference
Pins
Depending on the MCU pin count, the package
may feature separate V
AREF
and V
SSA
analog
power supply pins. These pins supply power to the
A/D converter cell and function as the high and low
reference voltages for the conversion. In some
packages, V
AREF
and V
SSA
pins are not available
(refer to
Section 2 on page 8
). In this case the an-
alog supply and reference pads are internally
bonded to the V
DD
and V
SS
pins.
Separation of the digital and analog power pins al-
low board designers to improve A/D performance.
Conversion accuracy can be impacted by voltage
drops and noise in the event of heavily loaded or
badly decoupled power supply lines (see
Section
12.13.2 General PCB Design Guidelines
).
12.13.2 General PCB Design Guidelines
To obtain best results, some general design and
layout rules should be followed when designing
the application PCB to shield the noise-sensitive,
analog physical interface from noise-generating
CMOS logic signals.
Use separate digital and analog planes. The an-
alog ground plane should be connected to the
digital ground plane via a single point on the
PCB.
Filter power to the analog power planes. It is rec-
ommended to connect capacitors, with good high
frequency characteristics, between the power
and ground lines,
placing 0.1F and optionally, if
needed 10pF capacitors as close as possible to
the ST7 power supply pins and a 1 to 10F ca-
pacitor close to the power source (see
Figure
91
).
The analog and digital power supplies should be
connected in a star nework. Do not use a resis-
tor, as V
AREF
is
used as a reference voltage by
the A/D converter and
any resistance would
cause a voltage drop and a loss of accuracy.
Properly place components and route the signal
traces on the PCB to shield the analog inputs.
Analog signals paths should run over the analog
ground plane and be as short as possible. Isolate
analog signals from digital signals that may
switch while the analog inputs are being sampled
by the A/D converter. Do not toggle digital out-
puts on the same I/O port as the A/D input being
converted.
Figure 91. Power Supply Filtering
V
SS
V
DD
V
DD
ST72XXX
V
AREF
V
SSA
POWER
SUPPLY
SOURCE
ST7
DIGITAL NOISE
FILTERING
EXTERNAL
NOISE
FILTERING
1 to 10
F
0.1
F
0.1
F
ST72F324, ST72324B
146/164
10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd)
12.13.3 ADC Accuracy
Conditions: V
DD
=5V
1)
Notes:
1. ADC Accuracy vs. Negative Injection Current: Injecting negative current may reduce the accuracy of the conversion
being performed on another analog input. The effect of negative injection current on robust pins is specified in
Section
12.13
.
Any positive injection current within the limits specified for I
INJ(PIN)
and
I
INJ(PIN)
in
Section 12.9
does not affect the ADC
accuracy.
2. Data based on characterization results, monitored in production to guarantee 99.73% within max value from -40C
to 125C ( 3
distribution limits).
Figure 92. ADC Accuracy Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Flash Devices
ROM Devices
Unit
Typ
Max
2)
Typ
Max
2)
|E
T
|
Total unadjusted error
1)
4
6
3
4
LSB
|E
O
|
Offset error
1)
3
5
2
3
|E
G
|
Gain Error
1)
0.5
4.5
0.5
3
|E
D
|
Differential linearity error
1)
CPU in run mode @ f
ADC
2
MHz.
1.5
4.5
1
2
|E
L
|
Integral linearity error
1)
CPU in run mode @ f
ADC
2
MHz.
1.5
4.5
1
2
E
O
E
G
1 LSB
IDEAL
1LSB
IDEAL
V
A REF
V
SS A
1024
--------------------------------------------
=
V
in
(LSB
IDEAL
)
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve
(2) The ideal transfer curve
(3) End point correlation line
E
T
=Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation
between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.
E
O
=Offset Error: deviation between the first actual
transition and the first ideal one.
E
G
=Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal
transition and the last actual one.
E
D
=Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation
between actual steps and the ideal one.
E
L
=Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation
between any actual transition and the end point
correlation line.
Digital Result ADCDR
1023
1022
1021
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1021 1022 1023 1024
(1)
(2)
E
T
E
D
E
L
(3)
V
AREF
V
SSA
ST72F324, ST72324B
147/164
13 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
13.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA
Figure 93. 44-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
Figure 94. 32-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
Dim.
mm
inches
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A
1.60
0.063
A1
0.05
0.15 0.002
0.006
A2
1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b
0.30
0.37
0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018
C
0.09
0.20 0.004 0.000 0.008
D
12.00
0.472
D1
10.00
0.394
E
12.00
0.472
E1
10.00
0.394
e
0.80
0.031
0
3.5
7
0
3.5
7
L
0.45
0.60
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
L1
1.00
0.039
Number of Pins
N
44
A
A2
A1
b
e
L1
L
h
c
E
E1
D
D1
Dim.
mm
inches
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A
1.60
0.063
A1
0.05
0.15 0.002
0.006
A2
1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b
0.30
0.37
0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018
C
0.09
0.20 0.004
0.008
D
9.00
0.354
D1
7.00
0.276
E
9.00
0.354
E1
7.00
0.276
e
0.80
0.031
0
3.5
7
0
3.5
7
L
0.45
0.60
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
L1
1.00
0.039
Number of Pins
N
32
h
c
L
L1
b
e
A1
A2
A
E
E1
D
D1
ST72F324, ST72324B
148/164
PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA (Cont'd)
Figure 95. 42-Pin Plastic Dual In-Line Package, Shrink 600-mil Width
-
Figure 96. 32-Pin Plastic Dual In-Line Package, Shrink 400-mil Width
Dim.
mm
inches
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A
5.08
0.200
A1
0.51
0.020
A2
3.05
3.81
4.57 0.120 0.150 0.180
b
0.38
0.46
0.56 0.015 0.018 0.022
b2
0.89
1.02
1.14 0.035 0.040 0.045
c
0.23
0.25
0.38 0.009 0.010 0.015
D
36.58 36.83 37.08 1.440 1.450 1.460
E
15.24
16.00 0.600
0.630
E1
12.70 13.72 14.48 0.500 0.540 0.570
e
1.78
0.070
eA
15.24
0.600
eB
18.54
0.730
eC
1.52 0.000
0.060
L
2.54
3.30
3.56 0.100 0.130 0.140
Number of Pins
N
42
E
E1
eA
eB
E
0.015
GAGE PLANE
eC
eB
D
e
b
b2
A2
A1
c
L
A
Dim.
mm
inches
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A
3.56
3.76
5.08 0.140 0.148 0.200
A1
0.51
0.020
A2
3.05
3.56
4.57 0.120 0.140 0.180
b
0.36
0.46
0.58 0.014 0.018 0.023
b1
0.76
1.02
1.40 0.030 0.040 0.055
C
0.20
0.25
0.36 0.008 0.010 0.014
D
27.43
28.45 1.080 1.100 1.120
E
9.91 10.41 11.05 0.390 0.410 0.435
E1
7.62
8.89
9.40 0.300 0.350 0.370
e
1.78
0.070
eA
10.16
0.400
eB
12.70
0.500
eC
1.40
0.055
L
2.54
3.05
3.81 0.100 0.120 0.150
Number of Pins
N
32
D
b2
b
e
A
A1
A2
L
E1
E
eC
C
eA
eB
ST72F324, ST72324B
149/164
13.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Notes:
1. The power dissipation is obtained from the formula P
D
=P
INT
+P
PORT
where P
INT
is the chip internal power (I
DD
xV
DD
)
and P
PORT
is the port power dissipation determined by the user.
2. The average chip-junction temperature can be obtained from the formula T
J
= T
A
+ P
D
x RthJA.
Symbol
Ratings
Value
Unit
R
thJA
Package thermal resistance (junction to ambient)
TQFP44 10x10
TQFP32 7x7
SDIP42 600mil
SDIP32 200mil
52
70
55
50
C/W
P
D
Power dissipation
1)
500
mW
T
Jmax
Maximum junction temperature
2)
150
C
ST72F324, ST72324B
150/164
13.3 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION
Recommended soldering information given only as design guidelines.
Figure 97. Recommended Wave Soldering Profile (with 37% Sn and 63% Pb)
Figure 98. Recommended Reflow Soldering Oven Profile (MID JEDEC)
Recommended glue for SMD plastic packages dedicated to molding compound with silicone:
s
Heraeus: PD945, PD955
s
Loctite: 3615, 3298
250
200
150
100
50
0
40
80
120
160
Time [sec]
Temp. [C]
20
60
100
140
5 sec
COOLING PHASE
(ROOM TEMPERATURE)
PREHEATING
80C
PHASE
SOLDERING
PHASE
250
200
150
100
50
0
100
200
300
400
Time [sec]
Temp. [C]
ramp up
2C/sec for 50sec
90 sec at 125C
150 sec above 183C
ramp down natural
2C/sec max
Tmax=235+/-5C
for 25 sec
ST72F324, ST72324B
151/164
14 ST72324B DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Each device is available for production in user pro-
grammable versions (FLASH) as well as in factory
coded versions (ROM). ST72324B devices are
ROM versions. ST72P324B devices are Factory
Advanced Service Technique ROM (FASTROM)
versions: they are factory-programmed HDFlash
devices. FLASH devices are shipped to customers
with a default content (FFh), while ROM factory
coded parts contain the code supplied by the cus-
tomer. This implies that FLASH devices have to be
configured by the customer using the Option Bytes
while the ROM devices are factory-configured.
14.1 FLASH OPTION BYTES
The option bytes allows the hardware configura-
tion of the microcontroller to be selected. They
have no address in the memory map and can be
accessed only in programming mode (for example
using a standard ST7 programming tool). The de-
fault content of the FLASH is fixed to FFh. To pro-
gram directly the FLASH devices using ICP,
FLASH devices are shipped to customers with the
internal RC clock source. In masked ROM devic-
es, the option bytes are fixed in hardware by the
ROM code (see option list).
OPTION BYTE 0
OPT7= WDG HALT Watchdog reset on HALT
This option bit determines if a RESET is generated
when entering HALT mode while the Watchdog is
active.
0: No Reset generation when entering Halt mode
1: Reset generation when entering Halt mode
OPT6= WDG SW Hardware or software watchdog
This option bit selects the watchdog type.
0: Hardware (watchdog always enabled)
1: Software (watchdog to be enabled by software)
OPT5 = CSS Clock security system on/off
Reserved, must be kept at default value in current
silicon revision. See "KNOWN LIMITATIONS" on
page 161..
OPT4:3= VD[1:0] Voltage detection
These option bits enable the voltage detection
block (LVD, and AVD) with a selected threshold for
Caution: If the medium or low thresholds are se-
lected, the detection may occur outside the speci-
fied operating voltage range. Below 3.8V, device
operation is not guaranteed.
For details on the
AVD and LVD threshold levels refer to
Section
12.4.1 on page 119
OPT2:1 = Reserved, must be kept at default value.
OPT0= FMP_R Flash memory read-out protection
Read-out protection, when selected, provides a
protection against Program Memory content ex-
traction and against write access to Flash memo-
ry.
Erasing the option bytes when the FMP_R option
is selected causes the whole user memory to be
erased first, and the device can be reprogrammed.
Refer to Section 7.3.1 on page 37 and the ST7
Flash Programming Reference Manual for more
details.
0: Read-out protection enabled
1: Read-out protection disabled
STATIC OPTION BYTE 0
7
0
STATIC OPTION BYTE 1
7
0
WDG
CSS
VD
Re
serve
d
Re
serve
d
FM
P
_
R
PKG1
RSTC
OSCTYPE
OSCRANGE
P
LLOF
F
HAL
T
SW
1
0
1
0
2
1
0
Default
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Selected Low Voltage Detector
VD1
VD0
LVD and AVD Off
1
1
Lowest Voltage Threshold (V
DD
~3V)
1
0
Medium Voltage Threshold (V
DD
~3.5V)
0
1
Highest Voltage Threshold (V
DD
~4V)
0
0
ST72F324, ST72324B
152/164
ST72324B DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont'd)
OPTION BYTE 1
OPT7= PKG1 Pin package selection bit
This option bit selects the package.
Note: On the chip, each I/O port has 8 pads. Pads
that are not bonded to external pins are in input
pull-up configuration after reset. The configuration
of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid
added current consumption.
OPT6 = RSTC RESET clock cycle selection
This option bit selects the number of CPU cycles
applied during the RESET phase and when exiting
HALT mode. For resonator oscillators, it is advised
to select 4096 due to the long crystal stabilization
time.
0: Reset phase with 4096 CPU cycles
1: Reset phase with 256 CPU cycles
OPT5:4 = OSCTYPE[1:0] Oscillator Type
These option bits select the ST7 main clock
source type.
OPT3:1 = OSCRANGE[2:0] Oscillator range
When the resonator oscillator type is selected,
these option bits select the resonator oscillator
current source corresponding to the frequency
range of the used resonator. Otherwise, these bits
are used to select the normal operating frequency
range.
OPT0 = PLL OFF PLL activation
This option bit activates the PLL which allows mul-
tiplication by two of the main input clock frequency.
The PLL must not be used with the internal RC os-
cillator. The PLL is guaranteed only with an input
frequency between 2 and 4MHz.
0: PLL x2 enabled
1: PLL x2 disabled
CAUTION: the PLL can be enabled only if the
"OSC RANGE" (OPT3:1) bits are configured to
"MP - 2~4MHz". Otherwise, the device functionali-
ty is not guaranteed.
Version
Selected Package
PKG1
J
TQFP44 / SDIP42
1
K
TQFP32 / SDIP32
0
Clock Source
OSCTYPE
1
0
Resonator Oscillator
0
0
Reserved
0
1
Internal RC Oscillator
1
0
External Source
1
1
Typ. Freq. Range
OSCRANGE
2
1
0
LP
1~2MHz
0
0
0
MP
2~4MHz
0
0
1
MS
4~8MHz
0
1
0
HS
8~16MHz
0
1
1
ST72F324, ST72324B
153/164
ST72324B DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont'd)
14.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE
ROM devices can be ordered in any combination
of memory size and temperature range with the
types given in
Figure 99
and by completing the op-
tion list on the next page. Flash devices are avail-
able only in the types listed in
Table 26
.
ROM customer code is made up of the ROM con-
tents and the list of the selected options (if any).
The ROM contents are to be sent with the S19
hexadecimal file generated by the development
tool. All unused bytes must be set to FFh.
Refer to application note AN1635 for information
on the counter listing returned by ST after code
has been transferred.
The STMicroelectronics Sales Organization will be
pleased to provide detailed information on con-
tractual points.
Table 26. Orderable Flash Device Types
Part Number
Version
Package
Flash
Memory
(KBytes)
Temp. Range
ST72F324K2TA
Automotive
TQFP32
8
-40C +85C
ST72F324K4TA
16
ST72F324K6TA
32
ST72F324K6TC
32
-40C +125C
ST72F324J6TA
TQFP44
8
-40C +85C
ST72F324J2TA
16
ST72F324J4TA
32
ST72F324J6TC
32
-40C +125C
ST72F324K2T6
Standard
TQFP32
8
-40C +85C
ST72F324K4T6
16
ST72F324K6T6
32
ST72F324K6T5
32
-10C +85C
ST72F324K2B5
SDIP32
8
ST72F324K4B5
16
ST72F324K6B5
32
ST72F324J2T6
TQFP44
8
-40C +85C
ST72F324J4T6
16
ST72F324J6T6
32
ST72F324J6T5
32
-10C +85C
ST72F324J2B5
SDIP42
8
ST72F324J4B5
16
ST72F324J6B5
32
ST72F324, ST72324B
154/164
Figure 99. ROM Factory Coded Device Types
DEVICE PACKAGE VERSION
XXX
/
Code name (defined by STMicroelectronics)
1= Standard 0 to +70 C
5= Standard -10 to +85 C
6= Standard -40 to +85 C
A = Automotive -40 to +85 C
B = Automotive -40 to +105 C
C = Automotive -40 to +125 C
T= Plastic Thin Quad Flat Pack
B= Plastic Dual in Line
ST72324BJ6, ST72324BJ4, ST72324BJ2
ST72324BK6, ST72324BK4, ST72324BK2
ST72F324, ST72324B
155/164
ST72324B DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont'd)
ST72324B (5V) MICROCONTROLLER OPTION LIST
Customer:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone No:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference/ROM Code* : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*The ROM code name is assigned by STMicroelectronics.
ROM code must be sent in .S19 format. .Hex extension cannot be processed.
Device Type/Memory Size/Package (check only one option):
Conditioning (check only one option):
Power Supply Range:
[ ] 3.8 to 5.5V
Version/Temp. Range (do not check for die product). Please refer to datasheet for specific sales conditions:
Special Marking:
[ ] No
[ ] Yes "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ " (TQFP32 7 char., other pkg. 10 char. max)
Authorized characters are letters, digits, '.', '-', '/' and spaces only.
Clock Source Selection:
[ ] Resonator:
[ ] LP: Low power resonator (1 to 2 MHz)
[ ] MP: Medium power resonator (2 to 4 MHz)
[ ] MS: Medium speed resonator (4 to 8 MHz)
[ ] HS: High speed resonator (8 to 16 MHz)
[ ] Internal RC:
[ ] External Clock
PLL
[ ] Disabled
[ ] Enabled
LVD Reset
[ ] Disabled
[ ] High threshold
[ ] Med. threshold
[ ] Low threshold
Reset Delay
[ ] 256 Cycles
[ ] 4096 Cycles
Watchdog Selection:
[ ] Software Activation
[ ] Hardware Activation
Watchdog Reset on Halt:
[ ] Reset
[ ] No Reset
Readout Protection:
[ ] Disabled
[ ] Enabled
Date
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note: CSS option is reserved in current silicon revision, and disabled (set to 1) by ST at ROM code entry.
Caution: The Readout Protection binary value is inverted between ROM and FLASH products. The option
byte checksum will differ between ROM and FLASH.
---------------------------------
ROM DEVICE:
---------------------------------
||
-------------------------------------
32K
-------------------------------------
||
-------------------------------------
16K
-------------------------------------
||
---------------------------------
8K
---------------------------------
TQFP32:
|
[ ] ST72324BK6T
|
[ ] ST72324BK4T
|
[ ] ST72324BK2T
DIP32:
|
[ ] ST72324BK6B
|
[ ] ST72324BK4B
|
[ ] ST72324BK2B
TQFP44 :
|
[ ] ST72324BJ6T
|
[ ] ST72324BJ4T
|
[ ] ST72324BJ2T
DIP42:
|
[ ] ST72324BJ6B
|
[ ] ST72324BJ4B
|
[ ] ST72324BJ2B
---------------------------------
DIE FORM:
---------------------------------
||
---------------------------------------
32K
---------------------------------------
||
---------------------------------------
16K
---------------------------------------
||
----------------------------------
8K
----------------------------------
32-pin:
|
[ ]
|
[ ]
|
[ ]
44-pin:
|
[ ]
|
[ ]
|
[ ]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Packaged Product
------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
-----------------------------------------------------
Die Product (dice tested at 25C only)
-----------------------------------------------------
[ ] Tape & Reel
[ ] Tray
|
[ ] Tape & Reel
|
[ ] Inked wafer
|
[ ] Sawn wafer on sticky foil
--------------------
Standard
--------------------
|
|
-------------------
Automotive
-------------------
||
---------------------------------------
Temp. Range
---------------------------------------
[ ]
|
|
0C to +70C
[ ]
|
|
-10C to +85C
[ ]
|
[ ]
|
-40C to +85C
|
[ ]
|
-40C to +105C
|
[ ]
|
-40C to +125C
ST72F324, ST72324B
156/164
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont'd)
14.2.1 Version-Specific Sales Conditions
To satisfy the different customer requirements and
to ensure that ST Standard Microcontrollers will
consistently meet or exceed the expectations of
each Market Segment, the Codification System for
Standard Microcontrollers clearly distinguishes
products intended for use in automotive environ-
ments, from products intended for use in non-auto-
motive environments.
It is the responsibility of the Customer to select the
appropriate product for his application.
14.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
STMicroelectronics offers a range of hardware
and software development tools for the ST7 micro-
controller family. Full details of tools available for
the ST7 from third party manufacturers can be ob-
tain from the STMicroelectronics Internet site:
http//:mcu.st.com.
Tools from these manufacturers include C compli-
ers, emulators and gang programmers.
ST Emulators
The emulator is delivered with everything (probes,
TEB, adapters etc.) needed to start emulating the
devices. To configure the emulator to emulate dif-
ferent ST7 subfamily devices, the active probe for
the ST7 EMU3 can be changed and the ST7EMU3
probe is designed for easy interchange of TEBs
(Target Emulation Board). See
Table 27
for more
details.
14.3.1 Socket and Emulator Adapter
Information
For information on the type of socket that is sup-
plied with the emulator, refer to the suggested list
of sockets in
Table 28
.
Note: Before designing the board layout, it is rec-
ommended to check the overall dimensions of the
socket as they may be greater than the dimen-
sions of the device.
For footprint and other mechanical information
about these sockets and adapters, refer to the
manufacturer's datasheet (www.yamaichi.de for
TQFP44 10 x 10 and www.ironwoodelectron-
ics.com for TQFP32 7 x 7).
Table 27. STMicroelectronics Development Tools
Note:
1. Flash Programming interface for FLASH devices.
Table 28. Suggested List of Socket Types
Supported Products
ST7 Evaluation
Board
ST7 Emulator
Active Probe &
T.E.B.
ST7 Programming Board
ST72324BJ, ST72F324J
ST72324BK, ST72F324K
N/A
ST7MDT20J-
EMU3
ST7MDT20J-TEB
ST7MDT20J-EPB/EU
ST7MDT20J-EPB/US
ST7MDT20J-EPB/UK
ST7-STICK/EU
ST7-STICK/US
ST7-STICK/UK
ST7MDT20J-EMU3 with
ICC add-on
Device
Socket (supplied with
ST7MDT20J-EMU3)
Emulator Adapter (supplied with
ST7MDT20J-EMU3)
TQFP32 7 X 7
IRONWOOD SF-QFE32SA-L-01
IRONWOOD SK-UGA06/32A-01
TQFP44 10 X10
YAMAICHI IC149-044-*52-*5
YAMAICHI ICP-044-5
ST72F324, ST72324B
157/164
14.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES
IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE DRIVERS
AN 969
SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND PC
AN 970
SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND EEPROM
AN 971
IC COMMUNICATING BETWEEN ST7 AND M24CXX EEPROM
AN 972
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION
AN 973
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER
AN 974
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE
AN 976
DRIVING A BUZZER THROUGH ST7 TIMER PWM FUNCTION
AN 979
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC
AN 980
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE
AN1017
USING THE ST7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MICROCONTROLLER
AN1041
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOID)
AN1042
ST7 ROUTINE FOR IC SLAVE MODE MANAGEMENT
AN1044
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS
AN1045
ST7 S/W IMPLEMENTATION OF IC BUS MASTER
AN1046
UART EMULATION SOFTWARE
AN1047
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERALS
AN1048
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER
AN1078
PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH IMPLEMENTING TRUE 0% & 100% DUTY CYCLE
AN1082
DESCRIPTION OF THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL PERIPHERAL REGISTERS
AN1083
ST72141 BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE AND FLOWCHART EXAMPLE
AN1105
ST7 PCAN PERIPHERAL DRIVER
AN1129
PERMANENT MAGNET DC MOTOR DRIVE.
AN1130
AN INTRODUCTION TO SENSORLESS BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVE APPLICATIONS
WITH THE ST72141
AN1148
USING THE ST7263 FOR DESIGNING A USB MOUSE
AN1149
HANDLING SUSPEND MODE ON A USB MOUSE
AN1180
USING THE ST7263 KIT TO IMPLEMENT A USB GAME PAD
AN1276
BLDC MOTOR START ROUTINE FOR THE ST72141 MICROCONTROLLER
AN1321
USING THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL MCU IN SENSOR MODE
AN1325
USING THE ST7 USB LOW-SPEED FIRMWARE V4.X
AN1445
USING THE ST7 SPI TO EMULATE A 16-BIT SLAVE
AN1475
DEVELOPING AN ST7265X MASS STORAGE APPLICATION
AN1504
STARTING A PWM SIGNAL DIRECTLY AT HIGH LEVEL USING THE ST7 16-BIT TIMER
AN1602:
16-BIT TIMING OPERATIONS USING ST7262 OR ST7263B MCUs
AN1633:
DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION IN NON-USB APPLICATIONS
AN1713:
SMBUS SLAVE DRIVER FOR ST7 I2C PERIPHERAL
PRODUCT EVALUATION
AN 910
PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING
AN 990
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD
AN1077
OVERVIEW OF ENHANCED CAN CONTROLLERS FOR ST7 AND ST9 MCUS
AN1086
U435 CAN-DO SOLUTIONS FOR CAR MULTIPLEXING
AN1150
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16
AN1151
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F876
AN1278
LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) SOLUTIONS
PRODUCT MIGRATION
AN1131
MIGRATING APPLICATIONS FROM ST72511/311/214/124 TO ST72521/321/324
ST72F324, ST72324B
158/164
AN1322
MIGRATING AN APPLICATION FROM ST7263 REV.B TO ST7263B
AN1365
GUIDELINES FOR MIGRATING ST72C254 APPLICATION TO ST72F264
AN1604:
HOW TO USE ST7MDT1-TRAIN WITH ST72F264
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION
AN 982
USING ST7 WITH CERAMIC RESONATOR
AN1014
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION
AN1015
SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING MICROCONTROLLER EMC PERFORMANCE
AN1040
MONITORING THE VBUS SIGNAL FOR USB SELF-POWERED DEVICES
AN1070
ST7 CHECKSUM SELF-CHECKING CAPABILITY
AN1324
CALIBRATING THE RC OSCILLATOR OF THE ST7FLITE0 MCU USING THE MAINS
AN1477
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH XFLASH MEMORY
AN1502
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH ST7 HDFLASH MEMORY
AN1529
EXTENDING THE CURRENT & VOLTAGE CAPABILITY ON THE ST7265 VDDF SUPPLY
AN1530
ACCURATE TIMEBASE FOR LOW-COST ST7 APPLICATIONS WITH INTERNAL RC OSCIL-
LATOR
AN1605:
USING AN ACTIVE RC TO WAKEUP THE ST7LITE0 FROM POWER SAVING MODE
AN1636:
UNDERSTANDING AND MINIMIZING ADC CONVERSION ERRORS
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS
AN 978
KEY FEATURES OF THE STVD7 ST7 VISUAL DEBUG PACKAGE
AN 983
KEY FEATURES OF THE COSMIC ST7 C-COMPILER PACKAGE
AN 985
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM
AN 986
USING THE INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE WITH ST7
AN 987
ST7 SERIAL TEST CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
AN 988
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN
AN 989
GETTING STARTED WITH THE ST7 HIWARE C TOOLCHAIN
AN1039
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES
AN1064
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7
AN1071
HALF DUPLEX USB-TO-SERIAL BRIDGE USING THE ST72611 USB MICROCONTROLLER
AN1106
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7
AN1179
PROGRAMMING ST7 FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS IN REMOTE ISP MODE (IN-SITU PRO-
GRAMMING)
AN1446
USING THE ST72521 EMULATOR TO DEBUG A ST72324 TARGET APPLICATION
AN1478
PORTING AN ST7 PANTA PROJECT TO CODEWARRIOR IDE
AN1527
DEVELOPING A USB SMARTCARD READER WITH ST7SCR
AN1575
ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR XFLASH AND HDFLASH ST7 MCUS
AN1576:
IN-APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (IAP) DRIVERS FOR ST7 HDFLASH OR XFLASH MCUs
AN1577:
ST7 - DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION IN ST7 USB DEVICES
AN1603:
USING THE ST7 USB DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE DEVELOPMENT KIT (DFU-DK)
AN1635:
ST7 CUSTOMER ROM CODE RELEASE INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE DRIVERS
AN 969
SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND PC
AN 970
SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND EEPROM
AN 971
IC COMMUNICATING BETWEEN ST7 AND M24CXX EEPROM
AN 972
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION
AN 973
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER
AN 974
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE
IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
ST72F324, ST72324B
159/164
AN 976
DRIVING A BUZZER THROUGH ST7 TIMER PWM FUNCTION
AN 979
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC
AN 980
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE
AN1017
USING THE ST7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MICROCONTROLLER
AN1041
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOID)
AN1042
ST7 ROUTINE FOR IC SLAVE MODE MANAGEMENT
AN1044
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS
AN1045
ST7 S/W IMPLEMENTATION OF IC BUS MASTER
AN1046
UART EMULATION SOFTWARE
AN1047
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERALS
AN1048
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER
AN1078
PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH IMPLEMENTING TRUE 0% & 100% DUTY CYCLE
AN1082
DESCRIPTION OF THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL PERIPHERAL REGISTERS
AN1083
ST72141 BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE AND FLOWCHART EXAMPLE
AN1105
ST7 PCAN PERIPHERAL DRIVER
AN1129
PERMANENT MAGNET DC MOTOR DRIVE.
AN1130
AN INTRODUCTION TO SENSORLESS BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVE APPLICATIONS
WITH THE ST72141
AN1148
USING THE ST7263 FOR DESIGNING A USB MOUSE
AN1149
HANDLING SUSPEND MODE ON A USB MOUSE
AN1180
USING THE ST7263 KIT TO IMPLEMENT A USB GAME PAD
AN1276
BLDC MOTOR START ROUTINE FOR THE ST72141 MICROCONTROLLER
AN1321
USING THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL MCU IN SENSOR MODE
AN1325
USING THE ST7 USB LOW-SPEED FIRMWARE V4.X
AN1445
USING THE ST7 SPI TO EMULATE A 16-BIT SLAVE
AN1475
DEVELOPING AN ST7265X MASS STORAGE APPLICATION
AN1504
STARTING A PWM SIGNAL DIRECTLY AT HIGH LEVEL USING THE ST7 16-BIT TIMER
AN1602:
16-BIT TIMING OPERATIONS USING ST7262 OR ST7263B MCUs
AN1633:
DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION IN NON-USB APPLICATIONS
AN1713:
SMBUS SLAVE DRIVER FOR ST7 I2C PERIPHERAL
PRODUCT EVALUATION
AN 910
PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING
AN 990
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD
AN1077
OVERVIEW OF ENHANCED CAN CONTROLLERS FOR ST7 AND ST9 MCUS
AN1086
U435 CAN-DO SOLUTIONS FOR CAR MULTIPLEXING
AN1150
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16
AN1151
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F876
AN1278
LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) SOLUTIONS
PRODUCT MIGRATION
AN1131
MIGRATING APPLICATIONS FROM ST72511/311/214/124 TO ST72521/321/324
AN1322
MIGRATING AN APPLICATION FROM ST7263 REV.B TO ST7263B
AN1365
GUIDELINES FOR MIGRATING ST72C254 APPLICATION TO ST72F264
AN1604:
HOW TO USE ST7MDT1-TRAIN WITH ST72F264
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION
AN 982
USING ST7 WITH CERAMIC RESONATOR
AN1014
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION
AN1015
SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING MICROCONTROLLER EMC PERFORMANCE
AN1040
MONITORING THE VBUS SIGNAL FOR USB SELF-POWERED DEVICES
IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
ST72F324, ST72324B
160/164
AN1070
ST7 CHECKSUM SELF-CHECKING CAPABILITY
AN1324
CALIBRATING THE RC OSCILLATOR OF THE ST7FLITE0 MCU USING THE MAINS
AN1477
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH XFLASH MEMORY
AN1502
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH ST7 HDFLASH MEMORY
AN1529
EXTENDING THE CURRENT & VOLTAGE CAPABILITY ON THE ST7265 VDDF SUPPLY
AN1530
ACCURATE TIMEBASE FOR LOW-COST ST7 APPLICATIONS WITH INTERNAL RC OSCIL-
LATOR
AN1605:
USING AN ACTIVE RC TO WAKEUP THE ST7LITE0 FROM POWER SAVING MODE
AN1636:
UNDERSTANDING AND MINIMIZING ADC CONVERSION ERRORS
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS
AN 978
KEY FEATURES OF THE STVD7 ST7 VISUAL DEBUG PACKAGE
AN 983
KEY FEATURES OF THE COSMIC ST7 C-COMPILER PACKAGE
AN 985
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM
AN 986
USING THE INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE WITH ST7
AN 987
ST7 SERIAL TEST CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
AN 988
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN
AN 989
GETTING STARTED WITH THE ST7 HIWARE C TOOLCHAIN
AN1039
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES
AN1064
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7
AN1071
HALF DUPLEX USB-TO-SERIAL BRIDGE USING THE ST72611 USB MICROCONTROLLER
AN1106
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7
AN1179
PROGRAMMING ST7 FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS IN REMOTE ISP MODE (IN-SITU PRO-
GRAMMING)
AN1446
USING THE ST72521 EMULATOR TO DEBUG A ST72324 TARGET APPLICATION
AN1478
PORTING AN ST7 PANTA PROJECT TO CODEWARRIOR IDE
AN1527
DEVELOPING A USB SMARTCARD READER WITH ST7SCR
AN1575
ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR XFLASH AND HDFLASH ST7 MCUS
AN1576:
IN-APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (IAP) DRIVERS FOR ST7 HDFLASH OR XFLASH MCUs
AN1577:
ST7 - DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION IN ST7 USB DEVICES
AN1603:
USING THE ST7 USB DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE DEVELOPMENT KIT (DFU-DK)
AN1635:
ST7 CUSTOMER ROM CODE RELEASE INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
ST72F324, ST72324B
161/164
15 KNOWN LIMITATIONS
15.1 External RC option
The External RC clock source option described in
previous datasheet revisions is no longer support-
ed and has been removed from this specification.
15.2 CSS Function
The Clock Security System function is not guaran-
teed in the current silicon revision. The features
described in
Section 6.4.3
are subject to revision.
The CSS must be disabled by option bit
15.3 Safe Connection of OSC1/OSC2 Pins
The OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins must not be left un-
connected otherwise the ST7 main oscillator may
start and, in this configuration, could generate an
f
OSC
clock frequency in excess of the allowed
maximum (>16MHz.), putting the ST7 in an un-
safe/undefined state. Refer to
Section 6.2 on page
24
.
15.4 Unexpected Reset Fetch
If an interrupt request occurs while a "POP CC" in-
struction is executed, the interrupt controller does
not recognise the source of the interrupt and, by
default, passes the RESET vector address to the
CPU.
Workaround
To solve this issue, a "POP CC" instruction must
always be preceded by a "SIM" instruction.
15.4.1 Clearing active interrupts outside
interrupt routine
When an active interrupt request occurs at the
same time as the related flag is being cleared, an
unwanted reset may occur.
Note: clearing the related interrupt mask will not
generate an unwanted reset
Concurrent interrupt context
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts
are handled normally, i.e.
when:
The interrupt flag is cleared within its own inter-
rupt routine
The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt
routine
The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the
code while this interrupt is disabled
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can
be avoided by implementing the following se-
quence:
Perform SIM and RIM operation before and after
resetting an active interrupt request.
Example:
SIM
reset interrupt flag
RIM
Nested interrupt context:
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts
are handled normally, i.e.
when:
The interrupt flag is cleared within its own inter-
rupt routine
The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt
routine with higher or identical priority level
The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the
code while this interrupt is disabled
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can
be avoided by implementing the following se-
quence:
PUSH CC
SIM
reset interrupt flag
POP CC
15.5 16-bit Timer PWM Mode
In PWM mode, the first PWM pulse is missed after
writing the value FFFCh in the OC1R register
(OC1HR, OC1LR). It leads to either full or no PWM
during a period, depending on the OLVL1 and
OLVL2 settings.
15.6 SCI Wrong Break duration
Description
A single break character is sent by setting and re-
setting the SBK bit in the SCICR2 register. In
some cases, the break character may have a long-
er duration than expected:
- 20 bits instead of 10 bits if M=0
- 22 bits instead of 11 bits if M=1.
In the same way, as long as the SBK bit is set,
break characters are sent to the TDO pin. This
ST72F324, ST72324B
162/164
may lead to generate one break more than expect-
ed.
Occurrence
The occurrence of the problem is random and pro-
portional to the baudrate. With a transmit frequen-
cy of 19200 baud (fCPU=8MHz and SCI-
BRR=0xC9), the wrong break duration occurrence
is around 1%.
Workaround
If this wrong duration is not compliant with the
communication protocol in the application, soft-
ware can request that an Idle line be generated
before the break character. In this case, the break
duration is always correct assuming the applica-
tion is not doing anything between the idle and the
break. This can be ensured by temporarily disa-
bling interrupts.
The exact sequence is:
- Disable interrupts
- Reset and Set TE (IDLE request)
- Set and Reset SBK (Break Request)
- Re-enable interrupts
15.7 Limitations specific to 16K ROM Devices
only
15.7.1 Read-Out Protection with LVD
Read-out protection is not supported if the LVD is
enabled.
15.7.2 I/O Port A and F Configuration
When using an external quartz crystal or ceramic
resonator, the f
OSC2
clock may be disturbed be-
cause the device goes into reserved mode control-
led by Port A and F.
This happens with either one of the following con-
figurations:
PA3=0, PF4=1, PF1=0 while CSS and PLL op-
tions are both disabled and PF0 is toggling
PA3=0, PF4=1, PF1=0, PF0=1 while CSS or PLL
options are enabled
This is detailed in the following table:
As a consequence, for cycle-accurate operations,
these configurations are prohibited in either input
or output mode.
Workaround:
To avoid this occurring, it is recommended to con-
nect one of these pins to GND (PF4 or PF0) or
V
DD
(PA3 or PF1).
15.8 Limitations in 32K ROM Devices only
The power consumption in Active Halt mode is
190A typ. and 300A max.
CSS PLL PA3 PF4 PF1 PF0
Clock
Disturbance
OFF OFF
0
1
0
Tog
glin
g
Max. 2 clock
cycles lost at
each rising or
falling edge of
PF0
x
ON
0
1
0
1
Max. 1 clock
cycle lost out
of every 16
ON
x
ST72F324, ST72324B
163/164
16 REVISION HISTORY
Table 29. Revision History
Date
Revision
Description of Changes
05-May-2004
2.0
Merged ST72F324 Flash with ST72324B ROM datasheet.
Vt POR max modified in
Section 12.4 on page 119
Added
Figure 83 on page 138
Modified V
AREF
min in
"10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS" on page 143
Modified I INJ for PB0 in
Section 12.9
Added
"Clearing active interrupts outside interrupt routine" on page 161
Modified
"Limitations in 32K ROM Devices only" on page 162
ST72F324, ST72324B
164/164
Notes:
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences
of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted
by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject
to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not
authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without express written approval of STMicroelectronics.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics.
All other names are the property of their respective owners
2004 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved
STMicroelectronics GROUP OF COMPANIES
Australia Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan -
Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States
www.st.com